JP7099499B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the start winning opening and a start winning is detected while a variable display (variation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , There is a case where the variable effect related to the starting prize is suspended up to a predetermined number. When the execution of the variation effect during execution is completed, the execution of the variation effect related to the first detected start prize among the pending unexecuted variation effects is started (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340046

When the variable effect is suspended, there is a possibility that there is a winning variable effect in the reserved variable effect. There is a desire among the players to grasp the information related to the pending fluctuation effect at an appropriate timing for the player.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately transmitting information related to dynamic display of reserved identification information.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is an acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. When the predetermined identification information appears, the player is given a predetermined game value, and a predetermined number of information acquired by the acquisition means is used until at least the determination by the determination means is used. The movement of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the storage means stored as the upper limit and the information stored in the storage means. The determination means for determining whether or not there is a target display, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the detection means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the detection means described above. When it is detected that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the notification means that can be notified based on the judgment result by the determination means while the operation is being performed, and the notification means that can be notified while the operation is being performed. It is provided with a means for causing the notification by the notification means to be performed by the display means on which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, an acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display executing means for causing the display means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the above, and the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means. When this is done, a storage means that imparts a predetermined game value to the player and stores the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until at least used for the determination by the determination means. , Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. A determination means for determining the above, an operation means that can be operated by the player, a detection means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a predetermined operation means for the operation means by the detection means. When it is detected that an operation has been performed, the notification means that can be notified based on the judgment result by the determination means while the operation is being performed and the notification means by the notification means while the operation is being performed are notified. Since the display means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information is provided, there is an effect that the information related to the dynamic display of the reserved identification information can be suitably notified.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which showed the structure of various counters, the holding ball storage area, and the holding ball execution area schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, and (c) is a diagram in which the number of reserved balls is 2. It is the figure which showed the example of the variation pattern table for a big hit schematically in the case of, (d) is the figure which showed an example of the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) when the number of reserved balls is 2. (E) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) when the number of reserved balls is 2. It is a figure which showed the structure of the look-ahead information storage area schematically. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a variation effect notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device. .. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a figure which showed the example of the display data table for variation schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the additional data table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the notification process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the notification button determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device, and (b) shows the notification execution determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which showed the ball launch stop determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the notification display setting process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the notification stop determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device, and (b) shows the notification button invalidation release process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (C) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the confirmed command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing the demo command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variable time notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (C) is a flowchart showing the notification stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed a part of the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot notification image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. (A) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation time notification image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) shows the notification image erasing process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, 65a, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front. A notification button 23 is provided on the right side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed and operated by the player, for example, when the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, is changed. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the content of the so-called super reach effect, which is one aspect of the variable effect.

The variable effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as described later, the ball launched into the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (the first entry opening 64 described later). (See Fig. 2). It is a production that presents the result of the lottery (whether it is a big hit or not) to the player.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "empty stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Various effects such as the above-mentioned variable effect and the reach effect executed during the variable effect are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during a period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation in which the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation invisible to the player. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, it is repeatedly changed in the order of "city stage"-> "empty stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"->. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

Further, when the normal reach effect is started in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. It is configured to be displayed on the display device 81.

On the selection screen, a plurality of effect mode candidates that can be selected as the effect mode of super reach are displayed, and one of the effect mode candidates is selected. If the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect mode candidate is changed. Then, the effect mode of the super reach is determined based on the effect mode candidate selected when developing into the super reach, and the super reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the effect mode.

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player moves forward with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward with respect to the pachinko machine 10). , Rear, right and left) may be configured with an operating lever that can be tilted. Then, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the effect mode of super reach may be selected based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted.

The notification button 23 is a push operation type button, and when the push operation is continued for a predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment), the fluctuation that becomes a big hit in the variable effect being executed and the variable effect being held is changed. This is a button for notifying the player when there is an effect.

Although the details will be described later, when the pachinko machine 10 detects a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) while the variation effect is being executed by the third symbol display device 81, The fluctuation effect is suspended up to a predetermined number (4 in the pachinko machine 10). Then, when the execution of the variable effect being executed is completed, the execution of the previously reserved variable effect is started. At the start of this execution, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the variable effect will be a big hit.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that it can be pre-read and determined before the start of the variable effect whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the pending variable effect. Then, when the notification button 23 is continuously pressed by the player for a predetermined time (1 second), it is being executed based on the lottery result performed for the variable effect being executed and the judgment result by pre-reading. It is determined whether or not there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit among the variable effect and the pending variable effect, and if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit, a notification to that effect is given.

As a result, when the player wants to stop the game and leave the seat, or when he / she wants to complete a message such as a call or e-mail by a mobile phone, the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time during execution. It is possible to know whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit among the variable effect and the pending variable effect.

Therefore, if there is no variable effect that is a big hit, the player can make a decision to immediately stop the game in order to perform an act such as leaving the seat or completing the business. Further, if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit, the player can make a decision to continue the game until the big hit. That is, the notification button 23 can be used to determine whether or not the player may immediately execute the action when he / she wants to leave the seat or complete the business.

Further, in the present embodiment, unless the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second), whether or not there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit among the variable effect being executed and the variable effect being held. Not announced. Unless there are special circumstances such as when you want to stop the game and leave the seat, or when you want to finish a call, email, etc. by mobile phone, before the player confirms the variable effect being executed or Knowing whether any of these will be a big hit before the pending variable effect is executed will result in deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In the present embodiment, it is not until the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second) to notify whether or not there is a big hit variation effect in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect. Then, if the player unintentionally touches the notification button 23 and the touching time is less than a predetermined time, a jackpot is included in either the running fluctuation effect or the pending variation effect. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the game is played.

The method of notification when the notification button 23 is pressed will be described later with reference to FIG.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in front view, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launching unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and a fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

The plurality of LEDs 37a display fluctuations by indicating whether or not the fluctuation is in progress due to the entry into the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) by the lighting state, or the stop symbol after the fluctuation is completed. As a result, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning is shown by the lighting state, or among the balls entered in the first entry opening 64, the ball (reserved ball) whose fluctuation has not been executed. The number of reserved balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, the hit / fail determination (big hit lottery) is performed for the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the jackpot type is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared.

The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation executed when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, but also when it is a jackpot. Is shown according to the type of jackpot.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, the "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). ..

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to the state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change, probability change state), in other words, the transition to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to play. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change, probabilistic change state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64.

On the other hand, the "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the first ball entrance It refers to the state of the game in which the ball easily enters 64.

In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 to open, or the electric accessory per hit. May change the number of times it is opened. Specifically, in the time-saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is longer than in the case other than the time-saving state, or the number of times the electric accessory is opened per time is set. It may be more than in the case other than the time saving state. Further, in the time saving state, at least two of increasing the hit probability of the second symbol, prolonging the opening time of the electric accessory, and increasing the number of times of opening the electric accessory can be performed at the same time. good.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 to display the variable display of the third symbol (variable effect). It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball in the second entry port 67. A second symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 5) described later, for example, left, middle, and right. Three symbol columns of are displayed.

Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached design that imitates a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc., which is almost full on the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that it is small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable display (variable effect) in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. When shifting to the high probability state (probability change state) after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with odd numbers added (corresponding to the "high probability symbol") are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low probability state after the end of the big hit, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to the "low probability symbol") are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds are the main display areas for variable display (variable effect) of the third symbol. Dm and the other upper 1/3 are sub-display areas Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, characters, and the like. Further, a reserved ball number display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls is provided in the central portion on the lower bottom side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right. The symbol column Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, the symbol column Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, and the display area is displayed. The symbol string Z3 is displayed in Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is placed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbol) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The reserved ball number display area Db is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the fluctuation display (variation effect) has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64. be.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, moving images are displayed in the small area Ds1 on the left and the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined motion, and sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or is usually a black boy. The color of the hair and the color of the normally white headband will change, and another character will appear to give a notice.

On the other hand, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variation effect (variation display) is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters is Holds up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the reserved ball number display area Db. In the reserved ball number display area Db, one reserved ball number symbol (“●” symbol) is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. ..

That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, it is reserved. Indicates that the number of balls is four. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the reserved ball number display area Db, the reserved ball number is displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display in which the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯”), the first ball entry port 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. Is configured to be).

The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holds is displayed according to the number of lights of the second symbol hold lamp 84.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and the number of times of passing through the second ball entry port 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example). , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5), and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol is changed by the third symbol display device 81. The production is executed. The first entry slot 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

The first ball entry port 64 is provided with an electric accessory having two blades covering the opening through which the ball enters the first ball entry port 64. By opening and closing the two blades of the electric accessory, the first ball entry port 64 is set to an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state). In the normal state, the first ball entry port 64 is in a closed state in which the blades of the electric accessory are closed (the blades stand upright), and the ball cannot enter the first ball entry port 64, or It is difficult to enter the ball.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at the symbol of "◯", the electric accessory of the first ball entry port 64 is operated for a predetermined time. From the state where the blades of the electric accessory stand up while the electric accessory is operating. It is in a state of being movable in a substantially V shape (inverted C shape), and the first ball entry port 64 is in an open state. When the first ball entry port 64 is in the open state, the ball can enter the first ball entry port 64, or the ball is easier to enter than in the closed state. That is, as a result of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83, the ball stops at the symbol of "○" and becomes a hit, and when the first entry port 64 is in the open state, the ball moves to the first entry port 64. It is possible to enter a ball and make it possible to perform many big hit lottery.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entry port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

A second ball entry port 67 is provided on the left side and the right side of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. The second entry port 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for the ball to pass through in the vertical direction. When the ball launched into the game area passes through the second entry port 67, the second entry port switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the on. Then, a winning lottery for the second symbol (also called a normal symbol) is held.

As a result of the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed on the ball passing through the second entrance 67, if it is determined to be a hit, the variation display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 is performed. After the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the first entry port 64 is activated. As a result, the blades of the electric accessory, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64, can move from a state in which the blades of the electric accessory stand up substantially vertically to a substantially V-shape (inverted C-shape) for a predetermined time. The ball can enter the first ball entry port 64, or the ball is easier to enter than in the closed state.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 is a main pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of variation display (variation effect) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. Execute the process. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a stop pattern table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main control by the various counters stored in the RAM 203 and the various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are mainly used for jackpot lottery, setting of variation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. It is used in the MPU 201 of the control device 110. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will also be described with reference to FIG. 7.

To set the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first random number counter C1 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. A per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. ..

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 20). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a hold ball storage area 203b composed of four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port 64. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first per random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, and the first hit from the initial value. The random number counter C1 is updated.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 20).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is at the timing when the ball wins the first entry slot 64 (starting prize). It is stored in any of the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the hold area is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot, it is determined to be a jackpot.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 7A. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is for a low-probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state (a period during which the probability is not changing), and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot than in the low-probability state. It can be divided into two types, one for high-probability states and the other for high-probability states used in the case of high-probability states (during probability change). Then, the number of big hit random numbers included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first hit random number counter C1, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the low probability state is 3, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the big hit random number table 202a. ing.

On the other hand, the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that are big hits in the high probability state is 30, and the values are "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322". , 354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,833,866,892 "is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. ..

In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set to the jackpot random number values so as not to be duplicated. It is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes the big hit according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), it becomes a big hit. Since the value of the random number can be difficult to predict, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and has a maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry slot 64 (starting prize), for example. Of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203, the first random number counter C1 is stored in the same reserved area as the reserved area.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the hold area 1 in the hold ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect. Or, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding area 1 in the holding ball storage area 203b is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those at the time of the big hit. .. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 7B. FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 7B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, "15R probability variation jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and 100. There is a "15R normal jackpot" in which the time is shortened during the number of fluctuations, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 7B, the value “0 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the value “40 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79 ”is associated with it, and the value“ 80 to 99 ”of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. .. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is " If "15R normal jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit, a 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, a 15R normal jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, and a 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a 20% probability. .. The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table according to the set probability.

The probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order in the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. Three stops (reach other than front and back), "reach other than front and back" where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs, and "completely off" where reach does not occur. Direction) The pattern is selected.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 Of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter C1 is stored in the same reserved area as the reserved area.

The ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of stop pattern tables 202c having different ranges of random values selected for the stop type, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. A plurality of stop pattern tables 202c are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a stop pattern table 202c with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. And it becomes easy to select "completely off". In this stop pattern table 202c, the "front-back off reach" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "front-back off reach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "front-back off reach" or "front-back off reach". Become.

Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, which is a narrow stop pattern table. 202c is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off". In this stop pattern table 202c, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter stop pattern table 202c, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main processing (see FIG. 20).

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. The determination of the fluctuation pattern is specifically the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have a reach type and detailed symbols of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation mode is determined, and the presence / absence of the advance notice effect execution and the execution mode of the advance notice effect are determined.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (c) to 7 (e). In the pachinko machine 10, as the fluctuation pattern table 202d, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 used at the time of a jackpot and a deviation fluctuation pattern table 202d2, 202d3 used at the time of a miss are prepared. Further, as the deviation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3, the deviation (probability change) is used depending on whether the gaming state is a time-saving state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, or a low-probability state at normal time excluding the time-saving state. A variation pattern table 202d3 and a variation pattern table 202d2 for deviation (normal) are prepared.

Further, each variation pattern table 202d1 to 203d3 includes a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 0 (that is, when there is no reserved ball), and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 1. A table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, a table referenced when the number of reserved balls is 3, and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 4 are provided separately.

It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to prepare a variation pattern table for each number of reserved balls, and each variation pattern table 202d1 to 203d3 is changed so that the table referred to simply on the condition of the number of reserved balls is changed. May be prepared. For example, each variation pattern table 202d1 to 203d3 may be prepared separately as a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3 and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more. .. Further, in each variation pattern table 202d1 to 203d3, the condition of the number of reserved balls for determining the table to be referred to may be different. For example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is prepared with a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3 and a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more. The table 202d2 may be prepared with a different table for each number of reserved balls, and the variation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation) may be prepared with one table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2 among the jackpot variation pattern tables 202d1 stored in the ROM 202.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type, regardless of the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the jackpot types are divided into the 15R jackpot common, which is referred to when the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot are determined, and the 2R probability variation jackpot, which is referenced when the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined. There is. Then, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value), the fluctuation pattern is according to the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. The group (group) to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is determined. In the group (group) of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect held in the holding area. Will be done.

In common with the 15R jackpot, three fluctuation patterns of fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds are prepared so as to be selectable, and each fluctuation pattern is prepared. Is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The variation A is a variation pattern in which a so-called normal reach in which the third symbols are aligned after a reach with a short variation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The variation B is a variation pattern in which a so-called super reach in which the third symbol is aligned after a reach having a longer variation time than the normal reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81. Super reach includes, for example, reach that develops from normal reach, as well as long reach that has a long reach. The variation C is a variation pattern in which a so-called special reach in which the third symbol is aligned after a reach having a longer variation time than the super reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The special reach includes, for example, a reach that further develops after the super reach, and a special reach that develops from the normal reach to a different destination from the super reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 7 (c), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 when the number of reserved balls is 2 is 0 to 10 for fluctuation A in the table common to the 15R jackpot. It is 11 to 99 for B and 100 to 198 for fluctuation C. Since the table common to 15R jackpots is selected when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is selected, it is easy to select the variable C in which the special reach is executed in order to give the player a sense of expectation. It has become. However, by configuring the variation A in which the normal reach is executed and the variation B in which the super reach is executed to be selected, it is possible to provide a playability in which a big hit can be expected from any reach.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, many things having different effects in each reach are prepared. For example, in the super reach, a rear image (a third symbol which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81) is prepared. There is a reach that changes the image displayed on the back side of the image quickly and displays it, a reach that suddenly displays a certain character, etc. It includes multiple reach with different production contents, such as those with the addition of. In the main control device 110, only the fluctuation A, the fluctuation B, and the fluctuation C are determined as the fluctuation patterns when the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is obtained, and in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, each variation A to Determine the detailed variation pattern corresponding to C. According to the detailed variation pattern, the variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 91.

For the 2R probability variation jackpot only, only the variation pattern of "2R variation" with a variation time of 59 seconds is prepared so as to be selectable. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take in the group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls, as shown in FIG. 7 (c). 2R fluctuations are associated with 0 to 198). That is, when the jackpot variation type is 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R variation is always selected as the variation pattern.

When the 2R fluctuation is selected by the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the 2R fluctuation. Therefore, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot type in the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 executes the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation. In the pachinko machine 10, as a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the 2R fluctuation, for example, while displaying characters such as "chicken" or "girl" in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, finally. A variation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a specific symbol, a variation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a specific symbol due to lighting or blinking of a specific lamp, or the like is included.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be configured to be determined by using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of a big hit or a reach effect before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another fluctuation type counter, or when the reach is established, the last. The number of symbols to be shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol is displaced from the front and back, etc.) may be determined by another variation type counter.

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, a group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot is provided, but in this pachinko machine 10, only the variation pattern of "2R variation" is selected when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached. A group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot may not be provided, and only the association between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot may be specified in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. In this case, when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R variation may be determined as the variation pattern without referring to the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, only "2R fluctuation" is selected when the 2R probability variation jackpot is achieved, but one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns when the 2R probability variation jackpot is achieved. You may do so. In this case, even in a group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot, such as a group common to the 15R jackpot, the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and a certain hold area is assigned. The variation pattern associated with the value of the stored variation type counter CS1 may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect reserved in the holding area.

FIG. 7D schematically shows an example of the deviation pattern table 202d2 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2 among the deviation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. It is a figure shown.

As shown in FIG. 7 (d), the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach that is referred to when the reach other than is determined and the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. It is attached.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in a certain hold area is not a value that becomes a big hit (big hit random number value), that is, a value that is out of the range, the game state is normal except for the time saving state. When in the low probability state, the variable type counter CS1 stored in the holding area according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1. The variation pattern corresponding to the value of is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

Two fluctuation patterns, a fluctuation D with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation E with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, are prepared for complete deviation only, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set for each fluctuation pattern. It is associated. When variation D or variation E is selected as the variation pattern, the third symbol variation device 81 executes a variation effect in which high-speed variation of the third symbol is started and then stopped and displayed without establishing reach. As shown in FIG. 7 (d), in the deviation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between each variation dedicated to complete deviation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is as follows. It is 0 to 98 and the fluctuation E is 99 to 198.

Further, in common with the reach, the above-mentioned three fluctuations A to C, that is, the fluctuation A in which the normal reach is executed by the third symbol fluctuation device 81 with the fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and the super reach with the fluctuation time of 60 seconds are the first. Three variation patterns are prepared so as to be selectable: variation B executed by the three symbol display device 81 and variation C executed by the third symbol display device 81 with a variation time of 90 seconds. In the deviation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between each variation common to the reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for variation A and 99 to 190 for variation B. , The fluctuation C is 191 to 198.

FIG. 7E schematically shows an example of the deviation pattern table 202d3 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2 among the deviation pattern table 202d3 stored in the ROM 202. It is a figure shown.

As shown in FIG. 7 (e), the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, similarly to the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table. Fluctuation D and variation E can be selected as the variation pattern, and it is referred to when the reach other than the anteroposterior reach and the anteroposterior reach is determined, and the variation A to C can be selected as the variation pattern. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation patterns that can be selected for each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in a certain hold area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of the range, and the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, Depending on the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern. Determined from table 202d3.

As shown in FIG. 7 (e), in the deviation pattern table 202d3, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between each variation exclusively for complete deviation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is as follows. It is 0 to 190, and the fluctuation E is 191 to 198. Further, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between each variation in common reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for variation A, 99 to 190 for variation B, and 191 to 198 for variation C. ing. That is, the correspondence between each variation in common reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same in the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability) variation pattern table 202d3.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is in a time-saving state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64, and there are many complete deviations (variation E) with a long fluctuation time. When executed, it takes time to start the next variable display, which may make the player wait and feel uncomfortable. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is lowered, which is not preferable.

Therefore, when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the complete deviation has a shorter fluctuation time than in the other gaming states (normal state excluding the time saving state) (complete deviation). The deviation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 are configured so that the variation D) can be easily selected. As a result, the possibility of causing discomfort to the player can be reduced by starting the next variable display at an early stage. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operating rate.

Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination and selected (presence or absence of a notice display or the like is selected). Further, the selection of the deviation type is divided into the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table and the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table, but even if the game state is normal, there are a plurality of reserved balls (for example). In the case of 3 or more if the maximum number is 4, the variation display may be terminated at an early stage, so that the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) may be referred to for selection.

Further, since the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the variation type is the front-back off reach or the reach other than the front-back deviation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the gaming state, it is for out-of-bounds ( The fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 do not include the group common to the reach, and these fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 are referred to only when the stop type is completely out of order. In addition, a variable pattern table to be referred to when the stop type is a reach other than the front-back off reach or a reach other than the front-back off reach may be prepared separately regardless of the game state.

In the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is the front-rear reach or the reach other than the front-rear reach and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the gaming state. Although there is, it may be different depending on the game state.

Further, in the variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 for deviations shown in FIGS. 7 (d) and 7 (e), the variation D and the variation E are simply referred to as “complete deviation variation”, and the “complete deviation variation” is selected. In this case, the variation D and the variation E may be selected with a predetermined probability by referring to another table. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

Returning to FIG. 6, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 250, reaches the maximum value (that is, 250), and then returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. Obtained when it is done. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined to be a hit, and the second symbol display device 83 has a symbol "○" as a stop symbol (second symbol). Along with the lighting display, the electric accessory of the first ball entry port 64 is activated, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 14). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 20).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the setting of (variation effect) and the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 20) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 19) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 18) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further has at least a hold ball number counter 203a, a hold ball storage area 203b, and a hold ball execution area 203c.

The reserved ball number counter 203a enters the first ball entry port 64 (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize") detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Based on the above), it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation display (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to four times. The reserved ball number counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (S613 in FIG. 19) after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S203 in FIG. 15). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variation effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 16).

The value of the hold ball number counter 203a (that is, the hold ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 15). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the hold ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the reserved ball number itself of the fluctuation effect held by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of hold times of the variation effect without accessing the main control device 110. Further, by transmitting a hold ball number command from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a start winning prize is detected, the number of hold balls of the variable effect managed by the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if the number of reserved balls deviates from the actual number of reserved balls held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 every time the hold ball number managed internally changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the reserved ball number display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, not only the value of the hold ball number counter 203a added by 1 in the hold ball number command but also the value of the hold ball number counter 203a added by 1. , The first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) in connection with the start winning that triggered the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a. The values of C3 and the variable type counter CS1 are also included.

That is, when there is a start prize, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the main control device 110 are changed. , It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the hold ball number command is changed based on the respective values. It pre-reads before the effect is executed, and determines what the variable effect will look like (whether it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) before the variable effect is executed. Then, based on the judgment result by the look-ahead, when the execution of various effects is decided or the notification button 23 is pressed, the variable effect that is being executed and the variable effect that is pending is a big hit. It is possible to announce whether or not there is one.

The reserved ball storage area 203b is a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 6) when a start winning prize is detected. It is a memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is calculated from the counter buffer. It is acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The hold ball storage area 203b has four hold areas (holds 1st to 1st) so that data corresponding to one start winning prize (counters C1 to C3 and CS1 values) can be stored (held) up to 4 times. It has 4 areas) (see FIG. 6).

The reserved ball execution area 203c is data (counters C1 to C3, CS1) to be referred to in processing such as a jackpot lottery and setting of variation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is a memory for storing the value).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the MPU 201 executes processing such as a jackpot lottery and setting of variation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Of the data (counters C1 to C3, each value of CS1) stored in the above-mentioned reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to one start winning is used in the reserved ball execution area 203c. Shift to. The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described. In the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used to set a jackpot lottery, a variation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Used by.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first used for determining the jackpot type are used. The hit type symbol counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning).

The holding ball storage area 203b is composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas), the first random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 for storing the value are stored. A per-type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

In this embodiment, the first random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variable type counter storage area 203b4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. Although it is provided in 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) can be stored up to four times. However, in that case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas). .. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the old start prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest start prize in time is stored in the reserved first area.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. Similar to the reserved ball storage area 203b, the reserved ball execution area 203c stores the values of the first random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2. The first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the hold first area of the hold ball storage area 203b is used as the hold ball. It shifts to each area 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 17), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has been reached, the random number value of the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved first area is transferred to the first random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserved ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random value of the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. , The random value of the variable type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the variable type counter storage area 203c4.

Then, when the data shift to the reserved ball execution area 203c is completed, the reserved ball first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed in which the data is packed in an area (first to third) that is one smaller than the area number. In the present embodiment, the data is shifted only in the holding area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203b.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. do. In this state, when the data in the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c and the reserved first area becomes vacant, the MPU 201 sets the data in the other areas (second to fourth) to each area. Shift to the area with the smaller number (1st to 3rd). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area. , End the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed in the hold areas (third to fourth) where the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. It can reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the hold area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area having an area number smaller by one. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, a variable staging or continuous operation. It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 425 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, a voice output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a notification button 23, various switches 208, and the like are connected to the input / output port 425, respectively. The various switches 208 are also connected to the main control device 110, and are a general winning opening switch that detects a ball that has entered the general winning opening 63 shown in FIG. 2, and a ball that has entered the first entry opening 64. The first entry port switch to detect, the specific winning opening switch to detect the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path through the out opening 66 are detected. The output signal of each switch is input to the input / output port of the voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect mode at the time, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than changing the stage, such as changing the effect mode of the super reach, the frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the frame button operation command, the display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the operation status of the notification button 23, and when it is determined that the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for one second, the variable effect during execution and the variable effect on hold are determined. It is determined by the look-ahead process whether or not there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the inside. Then, if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit among these variable effects, a big hit notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display an image indicating that the jackpot is included.

In addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a variation pattern table 222d as fixed value data. ing. These tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202c, and the variation pattern table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 201.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a random number counter C1 per first, a type counter C2 per first, and a stop pattern selection counter C3, which are acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the hold ball number command. , The look-ahead process is executed based on each value of the variation type counter CS1, the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, what kind of effect the pending variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead processing will be as a result (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) will be the variable effect. There is a variable effect that becomes a big hit among the variable effect being executed and the variable effect being held when the execution of various effects is decided or the notification button 23 is pressed by making a judgment before the execution of. Performs control such as notifying whether or not.

The RAM 223 includes a reserved ball number counter 223a, a look-ahead information storage area 223b, a notification button on counter 223c, a notification execution flag 223d, a notification execution counter 223e, a ball undetected counter 223f, a ball launch stop flag 223g, and a notification button invalid flag 223h. At least the confirmation command flag 223i is provided.

The reserved ball number counter 223a is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and is a main control, similarly to the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable effect held in the device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the reserved ball number counter 223a manages the number of reserved balls. ..

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the number of reserved balls for variable effect is added by entering the first ball entry port 64 and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. When the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value after addition of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, hold in the main control device 110). The number of reserved balls in the variable effect) is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a (see S1007 in FIG. 23).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is accompanied by the reception. When the mode of the variation effect in the display device 81 is set, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is subtracted by 1 (see S1108 in FIG. 24). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the hold ball number counter 223a according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the hold ball number counter 203a, so that the hold ball of the main control device 110 is held. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203a.

The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the reserved ball number counter 223a, or stores the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. At the timing of updating the value of, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a after storage or updating.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (see S1951 in FIG. 37 (a)).

As described above, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variation effect is reserved.

The look-ahead information storage area 223b is information for performing look-ahead processing, that is, the first random number counters C1 and 1 that are acquired from the counter buffer with the start winning in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the hold ball number command. This is an area for storing the values of the hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1. The voice lamp control device 113 executes the look-ahead process by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222.

Here, the details of the look-ahead information storage area 223b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the look-ahead information storage area 223b. The look-ahead information storage area 223b has five areas of read-ahead information 0th to 4th. In each look-ahead information 0th to 4th area, the first random number counter storage area 223b1 in which the value of the first random number counter C1 is stored and the first hit type in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is stored. At least a counter storage area 223b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223b3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223b4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

The read-ahead information 0th area is an area for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect currently being executed. Further, the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas are areas for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the reserved up to 4 fluctuation effects, respectively. Specifically, the look-ahead information first area is the area corresponding to the first reserved variation effect in time among the reserved variation effects, and the look-ahead information second area is the reserved variation effect. Of these, the area corresponding to the second oldest reserved variation effect in terms of time, and the look-ahead information third area corresponds to the third oldest reserved variation effect in terms of time. The fourth area of the look-ahead information is the area corresponding to the fourth oldest reserved variation effect in terms of time among the reserved variation effects.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 holds each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1. Extract from the ball count command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 as random numbers in the areas of the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command. It is stored in the counter storage area 223b1, the first hit type counter storage area 223b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223b3, and the variation type counter storage area 223b4.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ N ≦ 4), the number of variable effects held at that time is N, and the reserved ball number command is used. Since the values of the included counters C1 to C3 and CS1 correspond to the Xth reserved variation effect in time among the reserved variation effects, each counter storage area 223b1 in the look-ahead information X area Stores the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to b4. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command in the hold X area of the hold ball number storage area 203b. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved X area of the main control device 110 are stored in the look-ahead information X area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command indicating the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the shift process in each area of the look-ahead information storage area 223b. That is, the reserved variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved variation effect in time is started. Therefore, each of the look-ahead information first areas corresponding to the first reserved variation effect is started. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 in the read-ahead information 0th area corresponding to the fluctuation effect currently being executed.

Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the look-ahead information second area are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the look-ahead information first area, and the look-ahead information first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 in the three areas are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 in the look-ahead information second area, and the counters in the look-ahead information fourth area are moved. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223b1 to b4 are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 in the read-ahead information third area.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main control device 110 are stored in the look-ahead information 0th area, and the look-ahead information 1st to 4th are stored. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110 are stored in each of the areas. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect held by the main control device 110 are stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b.

The voice lamp control device 113 grasps the number of fluctuation effects (number of reserved balls) reserved from the reserved ball number counter 223a when performing the look-ahead processing. Then, based on the number of reserved balls, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area where the fluctuation effect is reserved among the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas are pre-read, and the big hit in the variation effect. Whether or not it becomes, the fluctuation time, etc. are determined. For example, if the value of the reserved ball counter 223a is "1", the number of reserved balls in the fluctuation effect is one, so that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored only in the first area of the look-ahead information are stored. Is read ahead and a judgment is made. Further, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is "4", the number of reserved balls in the fluctuation effect is 4, so that the counters C1 to C3 stored for each of the read-ahead information 1st to 4th areas are stored. , The value of CS1 is pre-read and the judgment is made.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the voice lamp control device 113 accesses RAM 203 or the like of the main control device 110. Can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a look-ahead information storage area 223b, and stores the counters C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect held by the main control device 110 in the voice lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the read-ahead information storage area 223b, the read-ahead process can be executed by the voice lamp control device 113. That is, when the reserved variable effect is executed, what the result of the variable effect will be (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) is determined before the variable effect is executed. When the execution of various effects is decided or the notification button 23 is pressed, it is announced whether or not there is a big hit variable effect in the running variable effect and the pending variable effect. The control can be executed by the voice lamp control process.

The above-mentioned shift process in the look-ahead information storage area 223b is based on the number of reserved balls when the fluctuation pattern command is received (the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a before the update based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command). , Look-ahead information Data is moved (shifted) only in the areas corresponding to the reserved fluctuation effects among the first to fourth areas.

For example, the value of the reserved ball count counter 223a before the update when the fluctuation pattern command is received is "4", and the data is stored in all areas (look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas) of the look-ahead information storage area 223b. Suppose you are. In this case, the data in the look-ahead information 1st area is shifted to the look-ahead information 0th area, the data in the look-ahead information 2nd area is shifted to the look-ahead information 1st area, and the data in the look-ahead information 3rd area is changed to the look-ahead information 2nd area. And shifts the data in the look-ahead information 4th area to the look-ahead information 3rd area.

On the other hand, if the value of the reserved ball count counter 223a before the update when the fluctuation pattern command is received is "2", the data in the look-ahead information 1st area is shifted to the look-ahead information 0th area, and the look-ahead information 2nd area The data is shifted to the first read-ahead area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the read-ahead information third and fourth areas where the fluctuation effect is not reserved, the number of data shifts can be reduced and the control can be performed. The burden on the target can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the pre-reading information 1st to 4th areas may be configured to shift to an area where the area number is 1 smaller (pre-reading information 0th to 3rd areas). In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) for each of the read-ahead information 1st to 4th areas, so that the program can be easily created.

The notification button on counter 223c is a counter for counting the time during which the notification button 23 is continuously pressed. The notification button-on counter 223c is set to 0 as an initial value in the initial value setting process (see S810 in FIG. 21) of the RAM 223, which is executed when the power is turned on.

The operation status of the notification button 23 is determined by the notification button determination process (see S1201, FIG. 26 (a)) of the notification process (see S909 and FIG. 25) executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) by the MPU221. To. Then, (1) when the notification button 23 is not pressed, (2) a period during which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 described later is invalidated, and (3) a notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23. When is applicable to any one of the cases in which is being executed, the value of the notification button-on counter 223c continues to be initialized to 0 (see S1305 in FIG. 26 (a)).

On the other hand, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a situation where the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed, not during the period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, the notification button determination process is performed. The notification button-on counter 223c is incremented by 1 (see S1304 in FIG. 26A).

Here, the notification process in which the notification button determination process is executed is executed at 1 millisecond intervals in the main process (see FIG. 22). By updating the notification button on counter 223c as described above, the notification button 23 is not in the period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, but in the situation where the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed. When the pressing operation is continuously performed, the time during which the pressing operation is continued is counted in units of 1 millisecond. Further, when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is interrupted (when the player releases the notification button 23 that has been pressed), the notification button on counter 223c is initialized to 0, so that the notification button 23 is again used. When is pressed, the duration of the pressed operation can be correctly recounted by the notification button-on counter 223c.

The value of the notification button on counter 223c is referred to for determining whether or not the notification button 23 has been continuously pressed for 1 second or longer. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the notification execution determination process (see S1202 and FIG. 26B) is executed in the above-mentioned notification process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221, and the value of the notification button on counter 223c is set. Referenced. If the value of the notification button on counter 223c is 1000, it is determined that the notification button 23 has been pressed continuously for 1000 milliseconds, that is, for 1 second or longer, and the process for starting the execution of the notification is executed (FIG. FIG. 26 (b), see S1312). As a result, when the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for 1 second or longer in a situation where the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed, not during the period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated. , Notification of whether or not there is a big hit variation effect in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect is executed. The notification button-on counter 223c is determined to have a value of 1000, and is initialized to 0 when the process of starting the execution of the notification is performed (S1314 in FIG. 26B).

The notification execution flag 223d is a flag for indicating the execution of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, and when it is on, it indicates that the notification is executed, and when it is off, the notification is not executed. Represents to do. The notification execution counter 223e is a counter for counting the execution time of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23.

The notification execution flag 223d is set to off as an initial value in the initial value setting process (see S810 in FIG. 21) of the RAM 223, which is executed when the power is turned on. Further, the notification execution counter 223e is initialized to 0 in the initial value setting process.

Notification execution determination processing (see S1201, FIG. 26 (b)) of notification processing (see S909 and FIG. 25) executed at 1 millisecond intervals in the main processing (see FIG. 22) by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. When it is determined that the value of the notification button on counter 223c is 1000 and it is determined that the notification button 23 has been continuously pressed for 1 second, the notification execution flag 223d is set to ON and the notification execution counter 223e is set. It is initialized to 0 (see S1312 and S1315 in FIG. 26B).

The notification execution counter 223e is incremented by 1 in the notification stop determination process (see FIG. 29A) executed in the notification process when the notification execution flag 223d is on. As described above, since the notification process is a process executed at 1 millisecond intervals, the notification execution counter 223e is counted up by 1 every 1 millisecond while the notification execution flag 223d is turned on.

When the notification execution flag 223d is turned on, the notification execution flag 223d is turned on except during the jackpot effect or the demo effect in the notification display setting process (S1204, see FIG. 28) executed in the notification process. The look-ahead process is executed immediately after the flag is turned on and every second after the notification execution flag 223d is turned on (that is, when the remainder when the value of the notification execution counter 223e is divided by 1000 becomes 0) (that is, the remainder is 0). See S1334 in FIG. 28).

In this look-ahead process, among the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, the value of the first random number counter C1 or the like stored in each area where the variation effect is reserved is read ahead. , Determine whether or not it will be a big hit in the variable production. The number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is determined from the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a. Further, in the look-ahead processing performed in the notification processing, the value of the first random number counter C1 or the like stored in the look-ahead information 0th area is also read, and it is also determined whether or not the fluctuation effect during execution becomes a big hit.

When determining whether or not the variation effect being executed is a big hit, the contents of the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 at the time of executing the variation effect are stored and based on the contents. You may make a judgment. In this case, in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, the area corresponding to the look-ahead information 0th area may not be provided, and only the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas may be provided.

As a result of the look-ahead processing, if it is determined that there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the pending variable effect, or if the variable effect that is being executed is a big hit, the jackpot notification command is a display control device. It is transmitted to 114. By this jackpot notification command, the display control device 114 controls so that the jackpot notification image for notifying the existence of the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

This jackpot notification command is information indicating the number of times the variable effect that becomes a jackpot is held (the reserved ball that becomes a jackpot) when it is determined by the look-ahead process that there is a variable effect that becomes a jackpot among the variable effects that are pending. including. Specifically, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the look-ahead information first area, the variable effect having a hold count of "1" (that is, the first hold among the hold variable effects). If the variable effect is a jackpot, that information is included in the jackpot notification command. Further, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the read-ahead information fourth area, the variation effect in which the number of hold times is "3" (that is, the third reserved variation among the hold variation effects). If the production) is a big hit, that information is included in the big hit notification command.

If there is a big hit in two or more variable effects among multiple pending variable effects, the information indicating the number of hold times of the variable effect with the smallest number of pending changes in the big hit notification command is used as the jackpot notification command. included. In such a case, the jackpot notification command may include information indicating the number of times all variable effects that are jackpots are held.

In addition, even if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the pending variable effect, if the variable effect that is being executed becomes a big hit, the jackpot notification command does not include the information indicating the number of times the variable effect that becomes a big hit is held. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. In such a case, the jackpot notification command includes information indicating that the variable effect being executed is a big hit and information indicating the number of times all variable effects that are held are held. May be good.

While the notification execution flag 223d is turned on, the value of the notification execution counter 223e is determined in the notification stop determination process (see S1205, FIG. 29 (a)) executed in the notification process. When it is determined that the value of the notification execution counter 223e is 5000, the notification stop command is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the notification execution flag 223d is turned off. The notification stop command is a command for the display control device 114 to end the display of the jackpot notification image indicating the existence of the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the notification execution counter 223e is a counter that counts up by 1 every 1 millisecond as described above, it is based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 5 seconds after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed. The announcement ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9A, the details of the jackpot notification image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The jackpot notification image is displayed by changing the color of the boy's hair HB from the normal time in the image of the boy displayed in the small area Ds2. That is, while the hair HB is normally displayed in black (see FIG. 4B), when the jackpot notification image is displayed, the hair HB is displayed in gold. As described above, the jackpot notification image is displayed when the player presses the notification button 23 for 1 second or longer, and there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect. It is an image to be done. On the other hand, if there is no variable effect that becomes a big hit in both the variable effect being executed and the variable effect being held when the notification button 23 is pressed by the player for 1 second or longer, the big hit notification image is not displayed and is small. The color of the boy's hair HB in region Ds2 remains black. Therefore, the player presses the notification button 23 for 1 second or longer to check whether the color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 remains black or changes to gold, and is being executed. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit among the variable effect and the pending variable effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player wants to stop the game and leave the seat, or when he / she wants to complete a message such as a call or an e-mail by a mobile phone, the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for 1 second or longer. By operating it, it is possible to know whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit among the variable effect being executed and the variable effect being held. Therefore, if there is no variable effect that is a big hit, the player can make a decision to immediately stop the game in order to perform an act such as leaving the seat or completing the business. Further, if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit, the player can make a decision to continue the game until the big hit. That is, the notification button 23 can be used to determine whether or not the player may immediately execute the action when he / she wants to leave the seat or complete the business.

Further, in the present embodiment, unless the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second) by the notification button on counter 223c, the fluctuation effect that becomes a big hit in the variable effect being executed and the variable effect being held is a big hit. It is not announced whether or not there is. Unless there are special circumstances such as when you want to stop the game and leave the seat, or when you want to finish a call, email, etc. by mobile phone, before the player confirms the variable effect being executed or Knowing whether any of these will be a big hit before the pending variable effect is executed will result in deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In the present embodiment, it is not until the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second) to notify whether or not there is a big hit variation effect in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect. Then, if the player unintentionally touches the notification button 23 and the touching time is less than a predetermined time, a jackpot is included in either the running fluctuation effect or the pending variation effect. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the game is played. Further, if there is no other function for causing the player to press the button continuously for a predetermined time (1 second), the pressing operation continuously for a predetermined time (1 second) is included in the variable effect being executed or held. It is possible to give the player the recognition that the purpose is to notify whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit. Therefore, the player can avoid confusion with the function due to other pressing operations.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the pending variable effect as a result of performing the look-ahead process, the variable effect that becomes the big hit is pending in the big hit notification image. It is possible to notify the player of which fluctuation effect, that is, the reserved ball that is a big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, the reserved ball number symbol (“●” symbol) to be displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db is usually displayed in blue, but corresponds to the reserved ball R1 which is a big hit. The number of reserved balls to be held is displayed in red.

As described above, in the jackpot notification command, when it is determined by the look-ahead process that there is a variable effect that becomes a jackpot among the variable effects that are pending, the number of times the variable effect that becomes a jackpot is held (the reserved ball that becomes a jackpot). Information representing R1) is included. According to the information included in the jackpot notification command, if the reserved ball R1 to be a jackpot is the first reserved ball in the pending fluctuation effect, the number of reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db. The reserved ball number symbol displayed on the leftmost side is displayed in red, and the other reserved ball number symbols are displayed in blue. When the reserved ball R1 that is a big hit is the second reserved ball in the pending fluctuation effect, it is displayed second from the left among the reserved ball numbers displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db. The reserved ball number symbol is displayed in red, and the other reserved ball number symbols are displayed in blue. The example shown in FIG. 9A is a case where the holding ball R1 which is a big hit is the second holding ball among the holding fluctuation effects.

When the reserved ball R1 which is a big hit is the third reserved ball in the pending fluctuation effect, it is displayed as the third reserved ball number displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db from the left. The reserved ball number symbol is displayed in red, and the other reserved ball number symbols are displayed in blue. If the reserved ball R1 that is a big hit is the fourth reserved ball in the pending fluctuation effect, the fourth reserved ball number displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db (far right) from the left. The reserved ball number symbol displayed in is displayed in red, and the other reserved ball number symbols are displayed in blue.

If the jackpot notification command does not contain information indicating the number of times a variable effect that is a jackpot is held, it means that the variable effect being executed is a jackpot. In this case, all the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the reserved ball number display area D are displayed in blue.

When the player presses the notification button 23 for 1 second or longer and confirms that the color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 has changed to gold, the player further displays it in the reserved ball number display area Db. By checking which number of reserved ball symbols from the left is displayed in red among the reserved ball number symbols to be held, it is possible to grasp the reserved ball that will be a big hit. Further, if the color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 changes to gold and the number of reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db is all blue, the variable effect during execution is performed. It is possible to make the player understand that it will be a big hit.

As a result, if the player can grasp that there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the running variation effect and the pending variable effect, will it be a big hit immediately or will there be some time before it becomes a big hit? In addition, you can also know how many times the remaining fluctuation production will be performed until it becomes a big hit. Therefore, based on such information, the player can determine whether or not he / she has time to leave the seat or finish the work before the big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in two or more variable effects among a plurality of reserved variable effects, the number of hold times of the variable effect having the smallest number of hold among the variable effects that become the big hit is determined. Since the information to be represented is included in the jackpot notification command, the reserved ball number symbol displayed in red in the reserved ball number display area Db is also held corresponding to the variable effect with the smallest number of holdes among the variable effects that are the jackpot. Only the number of balls is displayed in red. In addition, when the variable effect being executed becomes a big hit, even if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the pending variable effect, the big hit notification command does not include the information indicating the number of times the variable effect that becomes a big hit is held. Is transmitted to the display control device 114, so that only the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 becomes golden, and all the reserved ball number symbols in the reserved ball number display area Db are displayed in blue. As a result, the player can grasp at least the latest fluctuation effect that is a big hit, and can determine whether or not he / she has time to leave the seat or finish the work by then.

In this embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed for 1 second or longer, the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 changes from black to gold when the fluctuation effect during execution becomes a big hit. The reserved ball number symbol displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db is displayed in blue, but when the notification button 23 is pressed for 1 second or longer, the variable effect being executed becomes a big hit. , The color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 may be displayed in rainbow colors instead of gold. As a result, the player can grasp that if the color of the boy's hair HB changes to gold, there is a big hit in the pending fluctuation effect, and if the color of the boy's hair HB changes to rainbow, execute. You can instantly grasp that the fluctuation effect inside is a big hit. That is, the player can easily grasp at least whether the variable effect being executed is a big hit or the variable effect being held is a big hit only by the change of the boy's hair HB.

In addition, when the notification button 23 is pressed for 1 second or longer and the variable effect during execution becomes a big hit, the color of the boy's hair HB is changed from black to gold, and the variable effect on hold is a big hit. If there is a variable effect that becomes, the color of the boy's hair HB remains black, and among the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the big hit variable effect is displayed. It may be changed from blue to red. As a result, if the color of the boy's hair HB changes, the variable effect during execution becomes a big hit, and if the color of the reserved ball number symbol changes, the variable effect corresponding to the changed reserved ball number symbol becomes a big hit. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in two or more variable effects among a plurality of reserved variable effects, a big hit notification command is provided with information indicating the number of times all the variable effects that are held are held. Also, if the variable effect being executed is a big hit and there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the pending variable effect, the information that the variable effect being executed is a big hit and the hold As mentioned above, the jackpot notification command may include information indicating the number of times the variable staging that is a jackpot is held in the variable staging. In such a case, the corresponding reserved ball number symbol may be displayed in red in the reserved ball number display area Db for all the pending fluctuation effects that are the big hits that can be grasped by the jackpot notification command. As a result, the player can grasp the number of hold times of all the variable effects that are big hits in the variable effects that have been held when the notification button 23 is pressed for 1 second or longer. Therefore, the player can know whether or not the jackpot will be a big hit once and then the jackpot again, and if the jackpot is multiple times, how many times the variable staging will be performed during the big hit. At that point, the player can be made to decide whether to leave the seat or complete the business.

When the notification button 23 is pressed for 1 second or longer, the variable effect being executed becomes a big hit, and if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit among the pending variable effects, the variable effect being executed is performed. If the jackpot notification command includes information that is a jackpot and information that indicates the number of times all variable staging that is a jackpot is held among the pending staging, the color of the boy's hair HB will be rainbow-colored. The reserved ball number symbol corresponding to all the variable effects that are changed and become a big hit may be displayed in red in the reserved ball number display area Db. As a result, it is possible for the player to grasp at one time that the variable effect being executed becomes a big hit and the number of times all the variable effects that are held are held as big hits.

In addition, the presence or absence of the jackpot of the variable effect being executed is displayed on the boy's hair HB, and the presence or absence of the jackpot of the variable effect of the corresponding holding number for each reserved symbol displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db. May be displayed. That is, if the variable effect being executed is a big hit and there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the pending variable effect, the boy's hair HB and the holding ball corresponding to the pending variable effect that is a big hit. If there is a variable effect that changes the color with a few symbols and the variable effect that is being executed does not become a big hit, and if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the pending variable effect, the color of the boy's hair HB is not changed. The color may be changed only for the number of reserved balls corresponding to all the pending fluctuation effects that are big hits. As a result, it is possible to convey the variable effect, which is a big hit, to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, when there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the pending variable effect, as a method of notifying the player of the reserved ball that becomes the big hit, the corresponding number of reserved ball symbols displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db is supported. The method is not limited to changing the color of the reserved ball number symbol, and the corresponding reserved ball number symbol may be blinked or the shape may be changed from a circle to a square. Further, the effect of pointing to the corresponding reserved ball number symbol may be displayed by the character or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the number of times the reserved ball that is a big hit may be held may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or may be displayed by a lamp or the like provided separately from the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description of the RAM 223 will be continued. The ball non-detection counter 223f is a counter for counting the time during which no ball is detected in the general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening opening 66. The ball launch stop flag 223g is a flag indicating that the launch of the ball of the ball launch unit 112a that launches the ball toward the game area of the game board 13 is stopped, and when it is on, the launch of the ball is Indicates that the ball is stopped, and when it is off, it indicates that the ball is being launched. The ball non-detection counter 223f and the ball launch stop flag 223g are set to "0" and "off" as initial values in the initial value setting process (see S810 in FIG. 21) of the RAM 223 executed when the power is turned on.

The ball non-detection counter 223f has a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a in the ball launch stop determination process (S1203, see FIG. 27) of the notification process executed every 1 millisecond. When it is judged from the output signals of various switches 208 provided in each port that there is no ball entering the out port 66 (S1323), the ball launch stop flag 223g is off (that is, the ball launch). Is in a state where it is determined that is not stopped), and is incremented by 1 (S1327). As a result, in a state where it is determined that the launch of the ball has not stopped, the time during which there is no entry into the general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66 is set. It can be counted every 1 millisecond by the undetected counter 223f.

Here, the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66 are openings provided in the game area of the game board 13 as described above with reference to FIG. Also, the ball guided to the game area by the ball launch unit 112a is a mouth to be discharged to the outside of the game area. These are all the mouths where the ball is discharged from the game area to the outside. That is, when the ball does not enter these mouths for a predetermined time, it indicates that the ball is not launched into the game area by the ball launching unit 112a.

In the present embodiment, in the ball launch stop determination process, the ball non-detection counter 223f is 5000 or more (that is, the ball enters the general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66). If it is determined that the ball has not been detected for 5 seconds or more), it is assumed that the ball launching unit 112a has stopped launching the ball into the game area, and the ball launching stop flag 223g is set to ON. Further, when it is determined from the output signals of various switches 208 that the ball has entered the general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66, the ball launch stop flag 223g is set. It is set to off, and the ball undetected counter 223f is initialized to 0. By initializing the ball non-detection counter 223f to 0, it is possible to count the time when no ball is detected in the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66 again. There is.

In the present embodiment, the output signals of the various switches 208 are input not only to the main control device 110 but also to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives a general prize based on the output signals from the various switches 208. It was determined whether or not the ball entered the mouth 63, the first ball entry port 64, the specific winning port 65a, and the out port 66. Instead of this, when the main control device 110 detects the entry into the general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66 based on the output signals of the various switches 208, the entry is detected. The incoming ball detection command to be notified is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the general winning opening 63, the first entry, based on the presence or absence of the reception of the ball entry detection command. It may be determined whether or not the ball has entered the ball opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66.

The ball launch stop flag 223g is referred to in the notification display setting process (S11204, see FIG. 28) executed in the notification process. Specifically, as a result of the look-ahead process executed in the notification display setting process, it is determined whether there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the pending variable effect, or that the variable effect that is being executed is a big hit. When the jackpot notification command for displaying the jackpot notification image on the third symbol display device 81 is set, the ball launch stop flag 223g is referred to (S1337). Then, if the ball launch stop flag 223g is on, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation effect up to the latest fluctuation effect that becomes a big hit is calculated, and the variation time notification of each calculated variation time is notified to the display control device 114. Set the command (S1340).

For the variable effect being executed, the remaining variable time (the remaining variable time from that point to the end of the variable effect) is calculated. For the pending variable effects, the variable time is calculated for each variable effect. The calculation is up to the variation effect that is determined to be the most recent jackpot by the look-ahead process, and if the variable effect being executed is a jackpot, only the remaining variation time of the variable effect being executed is calculated. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 3, if the second reserved variation effect among the pending variation effects is the most recent big hit, the remaining fluctuation time of the running variation effect and the first one. The second-held variation time of each variation effect is calculated. That is, in this case, the variation time of the third reserved variation effect is not calculated.

The remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect during execution is determined from the fluctuation time determined based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation pattern command. It is calculated by reducing the elapsed time from the start of the variable effect being executed. The fluctuation time of the variation effect during execution may be determined from the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead information 0th area of the look-ahead information storage area 223b.

Each variation time of the pending variation effect is calculated based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b. In the present embodiment, the variable time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the big hit lottery is performed). Therefore, when calculating each fluctuation time of the pending variation effect, the number of reserved balls is started when the execution of each pending variation effect is started based on the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a at the time of calculation. It is done after calculating how many is.

For example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a when calculating each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect is "2", the number of reserved balls when the variation effect corresponding to the look-ahead information first area is executed. Is "1", and the number of reserved balls when the variation effect corresponding to the second area of the look-ahead information is executed is "0". Further, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a when calculating each variable time of the pending variable effect is "4", the number of reserved balls when the variable effect corresponding to the look-ahead information first area is executed. Is "3", the number of reserved balls when the variable effect corresponding to the look-ahead information second area is executed is "2", and the number of reserved balls when the variable effect corresponding to the look-ahead information third area is executed. Is "1", and the number of reserved balls when the variation effect corresponding to the read-ahead information fourth area is executed is "0".

When calculating each variation time of the pending variation effect, the number of reserved balls when the execution of each pending variation effect is started can be determined in the game area at the time of the calculation. This is because the launch of the ball to is stopped. That is, when calculating each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect, there is no possibility of winning the first ball opening 64, so that the number of reserved balls does not change. Therefore, even if the variation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variation effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), each variation of the pending variation effect. The time can be calculated reliably.

As described above, the variable time notification command is a display control device that displays the remaining variable time of the variable effect being executed and each variable time of the pending variable effect calculated for the variable effect until the latest big hit. This is a command for notifying 114. When the variable time notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the variable time notification image for notifying the player of each variable time notified by the variable time notification command is the above-mentioned jackpot notification image (running variable effect or The display control device 114 controls the display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the image) that announces that the pending variation effect has a variation effect that is a big hit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9B, the details of the fluctuation time notification image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a state in which the variation effect notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the fluctuation time notification image is displayed in the small area Ds3 in accordance with the jackpot notification image displayed in the small area Ds2 and the reserved ball number display area Db. In the fluctuation time notification image, the character string "remaining during execution" is displayed as a character string for indicating the remaining fluctuation time calculated for the fluctuation effect during execution, and the fluctuation time notification command is used to the right of the character string. The notified remaining fluctuation time (“5 seconds” in the example of FIG. 9B) is displayed.

Further, in the variable time notification image, the character strings "hold 1", "hold 2", "hold 3", and "hold 4" are displayed in order from the top below the character string "running remaining". "Hold 1" is a character string for indicating the fluctuation time of the first reserved fluctuation effect, and to the right of "Hold 1", the first reserved fluctuation notified by the fluctuation time notification command. The variation time of the effect (“30 seconds” in the example of FIG. 9B) is displayed. "Hold 2" is a character string for indicating the fluctuation time of the second reserved fluctuation effect, and to the right of "Hold 2", the second reserved fluctuation notified by the fluctuation time notification command. The variation time of the effect (“90 seconds” in the example of FIG. 9B) is displayed. Further, "hold 3" and "hold 4" are character strings for indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect held third and fourth, respectively, and are notified by the fluctuation time notification command on the right side of each character string. Display the variation time of the corresponding variation effect.

In addition, the variable time notification command notifies each variable time of the variable effect until the latest big hit, and not only the variable effect that is not held but also the variable effect that is reserved is the latest. The fluctuation time is not notified by the fluctuation time notification command for the fluctuation production executed after the fluctuation production that becomes a big hit. For the fluctuation effect in which the fluctuation time is not notified by the fluctuation time notification command, "-" is displayed in place of the fluctuation time on the right side of the corresponding character strings of "hold 1" to "hold 4".

For example, in the example of FIG. 9B, since the number of reserved balls is 3, there is no variable effect corresponding to "hold 4" (fourth reserved variable effect), so "-" is displayed. ing. In addition, since the reserved ball number symbol displayed second from the left among the reserved ball numbers displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db is displayed in red, it is the latest in the second reserved variable effect. Since it is a big hit, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect that is held third is not notified by the fluctuation time notification command. Therefore, the right side of "Hold 3" is also displayed as "-". If the variable effect being executed is a big hit, the variable time of all the pending variable effects is not included in the variable time notification command. Therefore, in this case, "-" is displayed on the right side of all "hold 1" to "hold 4".

When the player presses the notification button 23 for 1 second or longer and there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the variable effect being executed or the variable effect being held, the big hit notification displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the fluctuation time notification image as shown in FIG. 9B together with the image, the player not only grasps whether or not there is a fluctuation effect that becomes a big hit, but also immediately makes a big hit. You can grasp the time until it becomes. Therefore, the player can immediately decide whether or not he / she has time to leave the seat or finish the work, considering the time until the latest big hit.

In addition, since the fluctuation time (the remaining fluctuation time in the running fluctuation production) is displayed for each fluctuation effect until the latest big hit, the player can see which variation effect is being executed. It is also possible to make a decision as to whether or not to leave the room or complete the business.

Further, in the present embodiment, each variation time in the variation effect until the latest big hit is displayed, while the variation time of the variation effect executed after that is hidden (displayed as "-"). Will be). This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the time until the latest big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable time notification image is displayed together with the jackpot notification image only when it is determined that the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped. This is because, as described above, when calculating each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect, there is no possibility of winning the first ball opening 64, so that the number of reserved balls does not change. Even if the variable time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), each variable time of the pending variable effect is surely determined. This is because it can be calculated. Conversely, in the present embodiment, the variable time notification image is hidden together with the jackpot notification image unless it is determined that the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped. Therefore, since the launch of the ball into the game area is not stopped, it is possible to suppress the display of the inaccurate fluctuation time for the pending fluctuation effect, so that the player can leave the seat or complete the task. It is possible to prevent erroneous judgment as to whether or not there is time.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description of the RAM 223 will be continued. The notification button invalid flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is an invalid period. When it is on, it indicates that it is the invalid period, and when it is off, the notification button 23 is displayed. Indicates that the pressing operation is valid. The confirmation command flag 223i is a flag indicating that a confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110. When it is on, it indicates that a confirmation command has been received, and when it is off, it indicates that it has not been received.

Here, the confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 in the main control device 110 is confirmed. As it is displayed, it is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

The notification button invalid flag 223h and the confirmation command flag 223i are set to "off" as initial values in the initial value setting process (see S810 in FIG. 21) of the RAM 223 executed when the power is turned on. Then, in the notification execution determination process (see S1202, FIG. 26B) of the notification process, when the notification button on counter 223c becomes 1000, that is, it is determined that the notification button 23 has been pressed by the player for 1 second or longer. When this is done, the notification execution flag 223d is set to ON to start the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, and the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to ON. While the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to ON, the value of the notification button on counter 223c is set in the notification button determination process (S1201, see FIG. 26A) regardless of whether or not the notification button 23 is pressed. It keeps being initialized to 0. This invalidates the pressing operation of the notification button 23.

On the other hand, the confirmation command flag 223i is set to ON when a confirmation command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1011 in FIG. 23). Then, this confirmation command flag 223i is referred to in the notification button invalidation release processing (S1206, see FIG. 29B) of the notification processing. Specifically, when the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to on and the confirmation command flag 223i is on, the confirmation command flag 223i is turned off and the hold count counter 223a at that time is 0. If it is determined whether or not there is, and the hold count counter 223a is 0, the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to off.

If the confirmation command flag 223i is on, that is, if the hold count counter 223a is 0 when the confirmation command is received from the main controller 110, it means that the execution of all fluctuation effects including the hold has been completed and is on hold. It means that the fluctuation effect of is 0. That is, in the present embodiment, after the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is set to be invalid, all the variable effects including the reserved portion (including the variable effect that is held after the invalid setting is made) are performed. When the execution is completed and the pending fluctuation effect disappears, the notification button invalidation flag 223h is set to off, and the invalidation of the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is canceled.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated until the pending fluctuation effect becomes zero. That is, even if the notification button 23 is pressed during that period, the notification is not executed. As a result, according to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, for example, when a player leaves the gaming machine, even if a person other than the player presses the notification button 23, at least the pachinko machine In No. 10, until the pending variation effect becomes 0, it is possible to prevent a person other than the player from grasping whether or not there is a variation effect that becomes a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress another player from obtaining the profit of the jackpot obtained by the variable staging held by the game of the person who originally played the game, and it is possible to protect the profit of the person who originally played the game. .. Further, if the pending variation effect becomes 0, it is considered that all the variation effects reserved by the game of the person who originally played the game have been executed once, so that the player who played the game after that is the notification button 23. By pressing the button for 1 second or longer, a notification based on the pressing operation can be obtained.

In addition, the RAM 223 should start a variable effect in a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, or in an on state. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) that indicates.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 23) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The fluctuation start flag is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1005 in FIG. 23). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 24).

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect or continuous in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It controls the advance notice effect. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. There is.

A voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input port 238, and the display control device 114 issues a command indicating the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice lamp control device 113. Receive from. The MPU 231, the program ROM 232, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are also connected to the input port 238 via the bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the pachinko machine 10 has the same specifications as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the voice lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231. Further, the program ROM 232 has at least a display data table storage area 232a and an additional data table storage area 232b.

The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which the display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on the command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table describes the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time in the effect corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 determines an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, reads a display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a, and displays the read out. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the data table.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the voice lamp control device 113. For example, a variable effect, a demo effect, and the like. A display data table corresponding to the final display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

The demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The confirmation display effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed by receiving a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the fluctuation effect. It is a display effect. For example, if the stop symbol is a missed symbol, an effect of emphasizing the miss is performed, and if the stop symbol is either a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. The production is done. By visually recognizing this definite display effect, the player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol.

The restart effect is when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol due to the end of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. This is an effect of displaying an image in which the third symbol is vibrated (oscillated) around a predetermined position on the third symbol display device 81. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stopped symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

In the display data table storage area 232a, one display data table corresponding to the demo effect and the restart effect is stored. The variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, is prepared one by one according to the combination of the variation effect pattern and the stop symbol to be set. In addition, as a display data table corresponding to the definite display effect, a definite display of a missed symbol as a stop symbol, a definite display of a probabilistic jackpot (15R probabilistic jackpot or a 2R probabilistic jackpot), and a normal jackpot (15R normal). The ones that confirm the jackpot) are prepared respectively.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character and a character used for various effects such as a person or a character, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is any of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage (either "town center stage", "sea stage", or "mountain stage") selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Information is described that specifies whether to display the image or display a rear image different from the rear images A to C. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. .. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead of this, the back type and which state corresponds to the back type. Display state information indicating whether the rear image should be displayed may be specified. The rear image is displayed with the display range, brightness, hue, etc. changing over time. This display state information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the initial state. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the initial state indicated by the display state information.

Further, the display state information is information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the image based on this display data table on the third symbol display device 81) is started. You may. In this case, the MPU 231 has started drawing an image (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81) of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table. Based on the state of the rear image displayed in the stage and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the display state information. Identify.

Further, the display state information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table), depending on the back type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the third symbol display device 81), and the type information of the display state information (display on the display state information) together with the back type and display state information. For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 of the image based on the display data table). Information) indicating whether the information indicates the elapsed time from the start of the display) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the display state information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), a unique identification number assigned to the third symbol is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In the present embodiment, each of the third symbols is given a unique identification number for identifying each of them. For example, the main symbol of "0" is given "0" as an identification number, the main symbol of "1" is given an identification number of "1", and the main symbol of "2" is given an identification number of "". 2 ”is attached.

However, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly specified, but the variation effect performed immediately before is stopped. Offset information with the identification number of the symbol is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to each third symbol.

The offset information is specified as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the previous variation effect. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol. From the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to that address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before. Describe the difference (offset information) from the identification information of. As a result, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation time, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to that address and the fluctuation effect performed this time are stopped. The difference (offset information) from the displayed third symbol (stop symbol) is described. As a result, the variable effect can be executed so that the third symbol is stopped by the stop symbol set for the current variable effect.

It should be noted that the timing of switching from the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before as the symbol type information to the offset information with the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time is displayed by the third symbol at high speed. The predetermined time is set so as to be the set time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 11). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a, stored in the display data table buffer 233a provided in the work RAM 233, which will be described later, and the pointer 233c is initialized. Then, the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the next is based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 13) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233c, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable staging images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Returning to FIG. 10, the explanation will be continued. In the additional data table storage area 232b, the display contents of the effect to be additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110 are the additional data prepared for each effect. This is the area where the table is stored. Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110, for example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect. The concept of displaying and displaying another effect on top of that one effect, changing the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or changing the image displayed in one effect. It includes.

That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. , The drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of the one effect, and the drawing content required to change and display the image displayed in the one effect are defined. Is. The additional data table is prepared, for example, in accordance with the mode of the continuous notice effect (continuous notice mode) additionally set for the variable effect, and is stored in the additional data table storage area 232b.

Here, the details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of an additional data table. In the additional data table, the content (drawing content) of one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is specified in detail in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that should be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a semi-transparent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

For example, in the example of FIG. 12, a sprite for specifying an additional sprite (character) to be displayed for one character (character 1) in association with the address "097H" specified in the display data table. The type (character type), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information are specified. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. Null data is specified (corresponding to the address "0001H" in FIG. 12).

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the additional data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 12, in the example of FIG. 12). In "00FDH"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the additional data table is obtained. Is described.

When the MPU 231 receives the continuous advance notice command from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 reads an additional data table corresponding to the continuous advance notice mode indicated by the continuous advance notice command from the additional data table storage area 232b, and additionally data of the work RAM 233 described later. It is stored in the table buffer 233b. Then, each time the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is obtained from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. The drawing list (see FIG. 13), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image content to be drawn next.

For example, in the example of FIG. 12, when the pointer 233c becomes "097H", the MPU 231 is specified in the address "097H" of the additional data table in various sprites specified in the address "097H" of the display data table. A sprite of the character 1 is added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233c is "0001H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0001H" of the additional data table, it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address of the display data table "0001H". A drawing list is generated based on various sprites specified in "0001H". Further, when the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table is "End" information, or when the pointer 233c indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example,). , In the example of FIG. 12, it is determined that there is no display object to be added even when the pointer 233c indicates an address after "00FEH"), and drawing is performed based on various sprites specified in the display data table. Generate a list.

Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, according to the update of the pointer 233c, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. Therefore, the display data table and the additional data table are used. The specified image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110. When adding to an effect image (for example, a variable effect image) and displaying another effect image (for example, a continuous preview effect image), an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed is added. By setting the data table buffer 233b, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. As a result, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and there are 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a display in which an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image is defined. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 x (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables must be prepared, but a data table corresponding to other production images such as this pachinko machine 10 is used as an additional data table. By separately specifying, 32 + 5 = 37 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and the capacity increase of the display data table storage area 232a and the additional data table storage area 232b can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store the data tables corresponding to various aspects of the effect within the capacities prepared in the display data table storage area 232a and the additional data table storage area 232b, and it is easy to further diversify the effect images. Can be planned.

Further, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table as in the pachinko machine 10, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233a, Even if it is decided to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. By simply setting the data table buffer 233b, other effect images to be added and displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233b. While updating the pointer 233c every hour from the table, it is possible to easily identify the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer, and from these, one drawing list corresponding to one frame can be easily specified. Can be generated in. Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effects performed based on the command from the main control device 110, the effects to be additionally displayed are to be displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of effect display from a small number of data tables.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, an additional data table buffer 223b, a pointer 233c, a drawing list area 233d, and a timekeeping counter 233e.

The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 232a. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233c by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 13), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

The additional data table buffer 233b is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. It is a buffer for storing the additional data table corresponding to the effect image. The MPU 231 stores the display data table in the display data table buffer 233a, and temporarily writes the Null data in the additional data table buffer 233b, which means that there is no display object to be displayed. Clear the contents.

After that, the MPU 231 is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a based on a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. If there is an effect that determines the presence or absence and additionally displays it, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the additional data table storage area 232b, and the selected additional data table is used as the additional data table buffer 233b. Store in.

Then, the MPU 231 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b and the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a while adding the pointer 233c one by one. Based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 13) described later that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 is generated for each frame. .. As a result, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, since the All data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the third symbol display device 81 has an effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as it is.

The pointer 233c is for designating an address from which the corresponding drawing contents should be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in the buffers of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233c to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, in the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, the pointer The update process is executed (see S1911, FIG. 39 in FIG. 35), and the value of the pointer 233c is added by 1 (see S1981 in FIG. 39).

The MPU 231 has an address indicated by the pointer 233c from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b each time the pointer 233c is updated. The drawing contents specified in the above are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 13) described later is created.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the effect is displayed. The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. .. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

The drawing list area 233d is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 13, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design).

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes an address in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the image controller 237 describes a character described later provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area specified by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 is a character. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the semitransparent value. Processing was performed, composition processing with other sprites was performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing was performed according to the color information, and filtering processing was performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Above, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and an additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Based on the contents of (for example, a hold image displaying a hold ball number symbol, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, a jackpot notification image displayed based on a pressing operation of the notification button 23, a fluctuation time notification image, etc.), 1 A drawing list is created by generating detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for a frame and rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the sprite (display object) data is set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table, or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately sets the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. And that information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy the information specified in the table as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first is arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last is arranged on the frontmost side.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The timekeeping counter 233e is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 30 (c). ) Is executed (see S1603, FIG. 35), the time counting counter 233e is decremented by 1. As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233e becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The character ROM 235 includes a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, the above image data is stored as compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frames of a frame buffer area for storing an image for one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 237 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list and writes it to one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and the image data for one frame written to the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. Is read out, and the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, so that a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 237 reads the image data (compressed format image data) of the sprite defined in the drawing list from the character storage area 235a in the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and then draws the image data. Processing is performed according to the drawing information specified in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written to one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. By decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites specified in the drawing list, image data to be displayed in one frame is generated.

Writing one frame of image data to one frame buffer area and reading one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, both of which are completed in 20 milliseconds. Then, when the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data for one frame previously written from the one frame buffer area is subsequently read, and the other is in the meantime. Image data for the next frame is written to the frame buffer area of.

In this way, by alternately writing image data and reading image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 20. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and the main process will be described.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 4 milliseconds. By executing this timer interrupt process by the MPU 201, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, commands to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and are temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. .. In the external output process of S101, the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 15) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the variation processing (see FIG. 16) and the variation start processing (FIG. 17), which is one process of the variation processing, are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the ball launch signal set when firing the ball in the process of S111 described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of a big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process for opening / closing is executed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “◯” or “×”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is used. The variation display of the second symbol is carried out at. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

Next, the reading process of various winning switches is executed (S106). That is, the state of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second per random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the stop type counter CS1 and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values. When it reaches (899,99,99,198,250, respectively in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, respectively. Further, when the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the first random number counter C1 or the first random number counter CINI2. It is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C2, and the initial value is set in the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first ball entry port is executed. The start winning process accompanying the winning of 64 is executed (S110). The details of the variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15, a start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S110). The start winning process determines whether or not a ball has entered the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Execute (hold) processing. Further, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

When the MPU 201 executes this start winning process, it first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the first ball opening switch (not shown) that detects the ball entering (winning) into the first ball opening 64, which was read in the switch reading process (S106 of FIG. 14). The ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes.

When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (there was a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (holding of the variable effect held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of balls N) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S202). Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the number of balls on hold for operation is not N <4 (S202: No). , Return to timer interrupt processing.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entry slot 64 (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (number of reserved balls N) is set. Add 1 (S203). Then, each value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Of the reserved 1st to 4th areas, the 1st hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the 1st hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter 203b3, and the area corresponding to the value indicated by the hold ball number counter 203a. Each is held (stored) in the variable type counter storage area 203b4 (S204).

Specifically, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition by the process of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the reserved first area. Further, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", it is in each storage area of the reserved second area, and if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "3", it is in the reserved third area. If the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "4" in each storage area of the above, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the reserved fourth area.

Next, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (held ball number N) after the addition by the processing of S203, and the first random number counter C1 stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the processing of S204, the first hit. In order to transmit the hold ball number command including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113, the hold ball number command is sent to the command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203. Set in the buffer (S205). As a result, the hold ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next. When the processing of S205 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing.

As the value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the processing of S205, the value itself read from the counter buffer in the processing of S204 may be used, or the reserved ball storage area may be used in the processing of S204. The value stored (held) in 203b may be read out and used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S109). The variation processing (S109) controls the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes the middle of the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S303: No), this process is terminated as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N of the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110). Is greater than 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold ball number N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, and first, the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold). The number of balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variable start processing (S307) starts the execution of the variable effect of one of the reserved variable effects, so that the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203b toward the hold ball execution area 203c, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold ball execution area 203c from the hold first area to the hold ball execution. The data in each area is shifted such as area 203c, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S306, the fluctuation start processing for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift processing. (S307), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S304, when it is determined that the value (number of reserved balls N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 0 (S304: No), the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. Whether or not, that is, whether or not the demonstration is in progress is determined (S308). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, until it is determined that the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold ball number N) is larger than 0. Determine the interval as being demoed.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process as it is. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S101 of FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the display control device 113 transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 demos to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control to display the effect.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not in progress (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. The demo command may be set by executing the process of S309 when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the execution and the fluctuation stop. As a result, if there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the player can see the stopped symbol of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration effect immediately.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S310). The display time during the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S310: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

The variation processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is preset by the fluctuation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start processing, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the processing of S306, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter C2. Depending on the value of, a symbol that becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after a jackpot (a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (a probability variation state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds) It is determined whether the symbol is a probability variable jackpot to be transferred) or a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds).

In this embodiment, a blue LED is turned on when a 15R probability variation jackpot is reached after a big hit, a red LED is turned on when a 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and a red LED and blue are turned on when a 15R normal jackpot is reached. LED and turn on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In order to display the confirmation, a confirmation command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and display the stopped symbol in a definite manner by receiving the display confirmation command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a variation start process (S307), which is one process of the variation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S307). This fluctuation start process (S307) performs a "big hit" or "missing" lottery (big hit lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and also performs the first symbol display device 37. And the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start processing, first, the jackpot that determines whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 7B). A lottery (win / fail determination) process is performed (S401).

Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state, "7,307,582" is defined as the jackpot random number value. When the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420" , 448,486,506,543,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ”is defined as the jackpot random number value.

In the process of S401, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and they match. In some cases, it is determined to be a big hit. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S401 (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 7 (b)). (See) and, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S402).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, that is, the maximum number of rounds is a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds. Is it a 15R probability variable jackpot that shifts to a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, or a 2R probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds? It is determined. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is. 3 The display mode at the time of a big hit in the symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed in the display mode at the time of a big hit is determined. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot, first, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 7C) to be used is selected according to the number of reserved balls indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a. When 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S402, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the "15R jackpot common" group of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, any one of variation A, variation B, and variation C is selected.

When 2R probability variation jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S402, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the group of "2R probability variation jackpot only" of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. In this embodiment, only 2R variation is selected in this case. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern (variation A, fluctuation B, fluctuation C, 2R fluctuation) and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the third is based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, one of front-rear and front-rear reach, non-front-rear and non-reach, and complete disengagement is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type is set according to whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state. The tables are set differently.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the off-design symbol is determined. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state in the normal time excluding the time saving state, the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a at that time. 202d2 (see FIG. 7D) is selected. Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, the variation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability change) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the hold ball number counter 203a (probability change) (See FIG. 7 (e)) is selected.

Then, when complete deviation is set as the stop type in the processing of S404, it is held in the "complete deviation only" group of the selected deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 or deviation (probability) fluctuation pattern table 202d3. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation D or variation E is selected.

Further, when the front / rear deviation reach and the reach other than the front / rear deviation are set as the stop types in the processing of S402, the “common reach” of the selected deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 or deviation (probability) fluctuation pattern table 202d3. In the group of, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation A, variation B, and variation C are selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the process of S406, based on the variation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405, a variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S406). Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S402 or S404 via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S415), and the process returns to the variation process. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are voiced in the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command or a display type command based on the fluctuation pattern command, and transmits the display type command to the display control device 114.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S501) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S602). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process shifts to S611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if it is not stored (S605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S611 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S611.

As will be described later in the process of S706 in FIG. 20, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S612, S613) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S612, S613) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S612, S613) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S612, S613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S612), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S613). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S60: No). S607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S610, interrupts are permitted (S610). Then, it shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly executed.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the information on the occurrence of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S701: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S702 and S703).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 14) (S703), and the process shifts to the process of S701.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 14 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (4 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during the big hit, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is performed, and if the ball passes through the second entry opening 67, the display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 83 is performed. Will be done. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired first random number counter C1 depending on whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. Will be different. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant and changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned processes S702 and S703, which are one of the main processes, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number are used. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. .. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C2 that use these as initial values for updating are updated. Can be given randomness.

Further, in the process of S701, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 18 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S704 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S705). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S706), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S701 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S702 and S703, which is performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process, ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main control device 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the update of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed. .. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S601). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S701. As a result, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

In the present embodiment, the case where the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process and the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the remaining time of the timer interrupt process in the main process has been described. A part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the main processing. For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the large opening opening / closing process (S103), the second symbol control process (S105), and the switch reading that were executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. A part or all of the process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main process, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process to be executed every predetermined time is executed, and each of them is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the operation changes, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even in such a configuration.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 21, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S915 (see FIG. 22) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 22, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S912 in FIG. 22), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S915. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S915 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S802: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S915 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S915 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S803: No), and the data is transferred to the S808.

If the power off processing flag is on (S802: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S915, the voice lamp control device 113 MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S806). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S808, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S915 is executed (see S914 in FIG. 22). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S915 is executed, the process of S808 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S915 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (S811) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S808 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power is completely cut off, so that the processing of S808 is performed via the processing of S804 to S806. This is the case where the processing is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), S809, which is the clear processing of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the processing is shifted to S810, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S811), the process shifts to the main process.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S809 is that when the processing of S808 is reached via the processing of S804 to S806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S804. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous process of S901 was executed (S901), and if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S901: No). , S902 to S909 are not performed, and the process proceeds to S910. In the processing of S901, it is not necessary to process S902 to S909 in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond) to determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas the fluctuation display processing of S910 is performed. This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S911 or S911 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S911 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and by executing the processing of S910 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous process of S901 was executed (S901: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S902. When the process of S901 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 21, the process directly proceeds to the process of S902.

In the process of S902, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S903 to S911 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S902). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S906 described later (S903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S904). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S905 without being notified by the power on notification process.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S905). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, the stage is changed and the rear image of the display control device 114 is changed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The frame button 22 may be changed to an effect that can be held, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S905 is omitted.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S905) is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S906), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S907). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S907, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S908). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S906 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S907 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Runs in time.

Next, the notification process is executed (S909), and the process proceeds to the process of S910. In the notification process, based on the operation of pressing the notification button 23 by the player, if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the variable effect being executed or the variable effect being held, a jackpot notification image for notifying that fact is used. 3 It is a process of executing the control to display on the symbol display device 81. Details of the notification process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 to 29.

In the process of S910, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Executes the variable display process, which is the process set for transmission. The details of this variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. Then, after the fluctuation display processing, a command determination processing is performed (S911), in which processing is performed according to the command received from the main control device 110. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

When the processing of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S912). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S914), and the power-off process is executed (S915). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S916), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S913), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to the process of S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S913: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S911) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S911). This command determination process (S911) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control unit 110. Whether or not it is determined (S1001). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1001: Yes), the variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1002), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation display process (see FIG. 24) described later, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern is issued. Used when setting.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1003). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1003: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1004), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S1005), and the process returns to the main process. ..

The stop type command indicates the stop type of the variation effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the variation pattern command when the variation effect is started. This command is always sent from 110. By setting the variation start flag to ON by the process of S1005, in the variation display process executed later, based on the variation pattern extracted from the previously received variation pattern command and the stop type extracted from the stop type command. , A display variation pattern command and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of these variation patterns and stop types are generated, and a process for transmitting to the display control device 114 is executed.

When it is determined that the stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1003 (S1003: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1006). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S1006: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, the hold of the hold variable effect). The number of balls) is extracted and stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1007).

Here, since the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, the process of S1007 is performed every time there is a starting winning. , The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 is used when the start winning prize is detected. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a can be modified to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

Next, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 included in the received reserved ball count command is extracted, and the look-ahead information in the look-ahead information storage area 223b is extracted. It is stored in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls extracted from the reserved ball number command by the process of S1007 in the first to fourth areas (see FIG. 8) (S1008). That is, when the number of reserved balls is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), each value of the extracted first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1. Are stored in the first hit random number counter storage area 223b1, the first hit type counter storage area 223b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223b3, and the variation type counter storage area 223b4, respectively.

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command are acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize). When the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X, it is a value stored in the reserved X area of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110. That is, the same information (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110 is stored in the read-ahead information storage area 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b. That is, when the reserved variable effect is executed, what the result of the variable effect will be (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) is determined before the variable effect is executed. When the execution of various effects is decided or the notification button 23 is pressed, it is announced whether or not there is a big hit variable effect in the running variable effect and the pending variable effect. The control can be executed by the voice lamp control process.

Next, a display hold ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the hold ball count counter 223a updated by the process of S1007 is set (S1009), and the process returns to the main process. The display reserved ball count command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. As a result, the display control device 114 executes a process so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the reserved ball number symbol according to the reserved ball number.

When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1006 (S1006: No), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1010). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1010: Yes), first, the confirmation command flag 223i is set to ON (S1011). The confirmation command flag 223i is referred to in the notification button invalidation processing (see S1206, FIG. 29B) of the notification processing (S909) described later.

Next, a display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reception of the confirmation command is set (S1012), and the process returns to the main process. The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. By receiving the display confirmation command, the display control device 114 stops the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81, and corresponds to the stop type previously indicated by the display stop type command. By displaying the stop symbol, it is confirmed and displayed.

If it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1010 (S1010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1013), the process shifts to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114. The demo command received from the main control unit 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1013, is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then is the command output process of the main process (S902). ) Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the variation display process (S910) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S910).

This variation display process (S910) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to generate a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control unit 110, these commands are set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. It is a process to do. Further, in the variable display processing, the data shift processing of the look-ahead information storage area 223b is executed.

In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1101: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control unit 110. Therefore, this fluctuation display processing is performed. Exit and return to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1102), and then in the look-ahead information first to fourth areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b. The included data is shifted to the 0th to 3rd areas of the look-ahead information (S1103).

That is, in this case, the reserved variable effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved variable effect in time is started. Therefore, the look-ahead information corresponding to the first reserved variable effect is the first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 in one area are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 in the read-ahead information 0th area corresponding to the variation effect during execution. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the look-ahead information second area are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the look-ahead information first area, and the look-ahead information first. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the three areas are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the look-ahead information second area, and the counters of the look-ahead information fourth area are moved. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223b1 to b4 are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 in the read-ahead information third area.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main control device 110 are stored in the look-ahead information 0th area, and the look-ahead information 1st to 4th are stored. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110 are stored in each of the areas.

Next, the variation pattern in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S1002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 23) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1104). Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 113 of the extracted variation pattern is set (S1105). The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the fluctuation effect.

Next, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 23) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1106). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 113 of the extracted stop type is set (S1105). The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. In the display control device 114, when the variation effect executed by the display variation pattern command set by the process of S1105 is confirmed and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is set. do.

Next, the value of the hold ball counter 223a is decremented by 1 as the hold ball is consumed (that is, the change display corresponding to the hold ball is set) with the setting of the display change pattern command. (S1108), a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the hold ball number indicated by the value of the hold ball number counter 223a after the update is set (S1109). Then, it returns to the main process.

The display reserved ball count command set by the process of S1109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. To. The display control device 114 executes a process of displaying the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of reserved balls by counting the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the notification process (S909) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 29. First, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this notification process (S909).

The notification process (S909) is a process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 22), determines the pressing operation status of the notification button 23, and the player presses the notification button 23. If the pre-reading process is executed for 1 second or longer, and if there is a jackpot in the running or pending fluctuation effect, the jackpot notification image to notify that fact is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Display.

Specifically, first, a notification button determination process for determining whether or not the notification button 23 is pressed is executed (S1201), and then a notification for determining whether or not the operation for pressing the notification button 23 is continued for 1 second or longer is performed. Execution determination processing is executed (S1202). When it is determined in this notification execution determination process that the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is continued for 1 second or longer, the execution of displaying the jackpot notification image is started and the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated. .. The details of the notification button determination process and the notification execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), respectively.

Next, a ball launch stop determination process for determining whether or not the launch of the ball into the game area of the game board 13 is stopped is executed (S1203). The details of the ball launch stop determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

Next, the notification display setting process is executed (S1204). In the notification display setting process, when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is continued for 1 second or longer, the variable effect being executed becomes a big hit, or the variable effect being held has a variable effect that becomes a big hit. If it is determined that the variable effect being executed is a big hit, or if it is determined that there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the pending variable effect, the big hit notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Perform display control. Further, in the notification display setting process, when the jackpot notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the launch of the ball to the game area of the game board 13 is stopped, the remaining variable effect being executed. The control of displaying the fluctuation time notification image displaying the fluctuation time and each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is also executed. The details of the notification display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

Next, the notification button invalidation release process is executed (S1206). In the notification button invalidation release processing, the operation of pressing the notification button 23, which has been invalidated by the notification execution determination processing (S1202), is canceled on condition that all the reserved variable effects have been executed. It is a process. See FIG. 29 for details of the notification button invalidation release process. When the notification button invalidation cancellation process is completed, the notification process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26 (a), the details of the notification button determination process (S1201), which is one of the notification processes, will be described. FIG. 26A is a flowchart showing the notification button determination process.

In the notification button determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification button invalid flag 223h is on (S1301). When the notification button invalid flag 223h is off (S1301: No), it means that it is not the period during which the effect operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated. Therefore, it is next determined whether or not the notification execution flag 223d is on ( S1302). As a result, when the notification execution flag 223d is off (S1302: No), it means that the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 has not been performed. Therefore, the notification button 23 is then pressed. It is determined whether it is (on) (S1303).

Then, when the notification button 23 is pressed (S1303: Yes), 1 is added to the notification button on counter 223c (S1304) to end the notification button determination process and return to the notification process.

Here, the notification process in which the notification button determination process is executed is a process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process. When the notification button 23 is continuously pressed in a situation where the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed, not during the period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated by the processing of S1301 to S1304. In addition, the time during which the pressing operation continues is counted in units of 1 millisecond by the notification button-on counter 223c.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the notification button 23 has not been pressed (not on) (S1303: No), the notification button on counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S1305), and the notification button determination process is terminated. , Return to notification processing. As a result, when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is interrupted in less than 1 second (when the player releases the notification button 23 that was pressed and operated in less than 1 second), the notification button on counter 223c is initially set to 0. Therefore, when the notification button 23 is pressed again, the duration of the pressing operation can be correctly recounted by the notification button on counter 223c.

Further, when the notification button invalid flag 223h is determined to be ON as a result of the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), and when the notification execution flag 223d is determined to be ON as a result of the processing of S1302 (S1302: Yes). , S1305, the notification button on counter 223c is initialized to 0, the notification button determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process.

When the notification button invalid flag 223h is on, the notification button on counter 223c does not count up, so that the operation of pressing the notification button 23 can be invalidated. Further, in this case, by initializing the notification button on counter 223c to 0, if the notification button 23 is pressed after the invalid period of the notification button 23 pressing operation is canceled, the pressing operation is performed. The duration can be correctly recounted by the notification button-on counter 223c.

Further, even when the notification execution flag 223d is on, by initializing the notification button on counter 223c to 0, the notification based on the notification button 23 pressing operation is completed, and then the notification button 23 is pressed again. If so, the duration of the pressing operation can be correctly recounted by the notification button-on counter 223c.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26B, the details of the notification execution determination process (S1202), which is one of the notification processes, will be described. FIG. 26B is a flowchart showing the notification execution determination process.

In the notification execution determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification button on counter 223c is 1000 or more (S1311). If the notification button-on counter 223c is less than 1000 (S1311: No), the notification execution determination process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process.

On the other hand, when the notification button on counter 223c is 1000 or more (S1311: Yes), the notification execution flag 223d is set to ON (S1312), and the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to ON (S1313). As a result, when the player presses the notification button 23 continuously for 1000 milliseconds or longer, that is, for 1 second or longer, the notification execution flag 223d is set to turn on, so that the notification button 23 is pressed. Execution of the notification based on the operation is started.

In other words, unless the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second), it is not notified whether or not there is a big hit variation effect in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect. Unless there are special circumstances such as when you want to stop the game and leave the seat, or when you want to finish a call, email, etc. by mobile phone, before the player confirms the variable effect being executed or Knowing whether any of these will be a big hit before the pending variable effect is executed will result in deprivation of the enjoyment of the game. The player notifies whether or not there is a big hit variation effect in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect only after the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second). If the notification button 23 is touched unintentionally and the touching time is less than the predetermined time, whether or not the jackpot is included in either the running fluctuation effect or the pending variation effect. , Can be suppressed from being known to the player.

Further, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed by turning on the notification button invalid flag 223h by the process of S1313, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated. As will be described later, the invalidation of the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is continued until the execution of all the variable effects including the reserved portion is completed in the pachinko machine 10. As a result, according to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, for example, when a player leaves the gaming machine, even if a person other than the player presses the notification button 23, at least the pachinko machine In No. 10, until the execution of all the variable effects including the reserved portion is completed, it is possible to prevent a person other than the player from grasping whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to protect the interests of those who originally played the game.

Next, the notification button-on counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S1314). Then, the notification execution counter 223e is initialized to 0 (S1315), the notification execution time is counted based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the notification execution determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the details of the ball launch stop determination process (S1203), which is one of the notification processes, will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the ball launch stop determination process (S1203).

In the ball launch stop determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball launch stop flag 223g is off and the ball non-detection counter 223f is 5000 or more (S1321), the ball launch stop flag 223g is off, and If the ball non-detection counter 223f is 5000 or more, the ball launch stop flag 223g is set to ON (S1322), and the process proceeds to S1323.

When the ball launch stop flag 223g is off and the ball non-detection counter 223f is 5000 or more, it is determined that the ball launch has not stopped, and the general winning openings 63, 1st It means that the ball has not entered the entry port 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66 for 5 seconds or more. Then, as described above, the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66 all discharge the ball guided to the gaming area by the ball launching unit 112a to the outside of the gaming area. These are all the mouths to be played and the mouths from which the ball is ejected from the game area. That is, when the ball does not enter these mouths for 5 seconds or more, it indicates that the ball is not launched into the game area by the ball launching unit 112a.

In the process of S1322, in such a case, by setting the ball launch stop flag 223g to ON, the launch of the ball of the ball launch unit 112a that launches the ball toward the game area of the game board 13 is stopped. Show that. The ball launch stop flag 223g is referred to in the notification display setting process described later.

As a result of the processing of S1312, if the ball launch stop flag 223g is on or the ball non-detection counter 223f is less than 5000 (S1321: No), the process proceeds to S1323.

In the process of S1323, it is determined whether or not any of the general winning opening switch, the first entry opening switch, the specific winning opening switch, and the out opening opening switch is on (S1323). As a result, if it is determined that any of the general winning opening switch, the first entry opening switch, the specific winning opening switch, and the out opening opening switch is ON (S1323: Yes), the general winning opening 63, the first 1 A ball has entered any of the entry port 64, the specific winning opening 65a, or the out opening 66, and by extension, the ball of the ball launching unit 112a that launches the ball toward the game area of the game board 13 is launched. Since it means that there was, first, the ball launch stop flag 223g is set to off (S1324), and further, the ball undetected counter 223f is initialized to 0 (S1325). Then, the ball launch stop determination process is terminated. By initializing the ball non-detection counter 223f to 0, it is possible to count the time during which no ball is detected in the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66 again. There is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that all of the general winning opening switch, the first entry opening switch, the specific winning opening switch, and the out opening switch are off as a result of the processing of S1323 (S1323: No), then It is determined whether or not the ball launch stop flag 223g is on (S1326), and if the ball launch stop flag 223g is off (S1326: No), 1 is added to the ball non-detection counter 223f (S1327). Here, the notification process in which the ball launch stop determination process is executed is a process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process. Therefore, by executing the process of S1327, in a state where it is determined that the launch of the ball has not stopped, the general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66 are entered. The time when there is no ball entering can be counted every 1 millisecond using the ball non-detection counter 223f. When the process of S1327 is completed, the ball launch stop determination process is terminated and the process returns to the notification process.

On the other hand, if the ball launch stop flag 223g is turned on as a result of the process of S1326 (S1326: Yes), the ball launch stop determination process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process. As a result, if it is determined that the launch of the ball has stopped and there is no entry into the general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66, the ball Since the value of the undetected counter 223f holds a value of 5000 or more, when this ball launch stop determination process is executed in the notification process executed after 1 millisecond, the process of S1321 and S1322 causes the notification process to be executed. Subsequently, the ball launch stop flag 223 g can be set to ON.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the details of the notification display setting process (S1204), which is one of the notification processes, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the notification display setting process (S1204).

In the notification display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification execution flag 223d is on (S1331), and if the notification execution flag 223d is off (S1331: No), the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for 1 second or longer. Since it is not operated and the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed, the notification display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process.

On the other hand, if the notification execution flag 223d is on (S1331: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect is being produced or the demo effect is being produced (S1332). Then, if the jackpot effect is being produced or the demo effect is being performed (S1332: Yes), the notification display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process. As a result, even when the press operation of the notification button 23 is continuously performed for 1 second or longer and the notification is performed based on the press operation of the notification button 23, the jackpot effect or the demo effect is performed. If so, the notification will not be executed. Therefore, when the jackpot effect is performed, the player can concentrate on the jackpot. Further, when the demo effect is performed, the variable effect has not been performed for a predetermined time or more, there is no reserved variable effect, and the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is unnecessary. .. Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to prevent wasteful processing for making the notification.

Here, whether the jackpot effect is being produced or the demo effect is being produced is determined based on the command received from the main control device 110. For example, after receiving the opening command transmitted from the main control device 110 when starting the jackpot opening effect, the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when starting the jackpot ending effect. Until the ending production is finished, it is judged that the jackpot production is in progress. Further, it is determined that the demo effect is in progress from the time when the demo command instructing the start of the demo effect is received from the main control device 110 to the time when the next variation pattern command is received.

It should be noted that the notification may be performed based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 during the jackpot effect. In this case, in the process of S1332, it may be determined only whether or not the demo effect is being produced. .. In this case, since the player can confirm whether or not there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the pending variable effect during the big hit effect, whether or not the player can leave the seat or finish the work after the current big hit is finished. It can be determined in advance during the jackpot production.

Further, in the process of S1332, it may be determined only whether or not the jackpot effect is being performed. In this case, the process for performing the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is unnecessarily executed during the demo effect. However, since the step of determining whether or not the demo is being produced is not required, the program required for the notification display setting process can be reduced. Further, the processing of S1332 may be omitted.

In the process of S1332, when neither the jackpot effect nor the demo effect is performed (S1332: No), then the value of the notification execution counter 223e is divided by 1000 to determine whether or not the remainder is 0 (S1333). Here, the notification execution counter 223e is initialized to 0 when the notification execution flag 223d is turned on, and is incremented by 1 every second as described later. Therefore, in the processing of S1333, it is determined that the remainder obtained by dividing the value of the notification execution counter 223e by 1000 is 0 (S1333: Yes) immediately after the notification execution flag 223d is turned on and the notification execution flag 223d. Is turned on every second, and the look-ahead process is executed at this timing (S1334). On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1333, if the remainder obtained by dividing the value of the notification execution counter 223e by 1000 is not 0 (S1333: No), the notification display setting processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification processing.

In the look-ahead process of S1334, among the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, the value of the first random number counter C1 or the like stored in each area where the variation effect is reserved is read ahead. Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect is a big hit. The number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is determined from the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a. Further, in the look-ahead processing performed in the notification processing, the value of the first random number counter C1 or the like stored in the look-ahead information 0th area is also read, and it is also determined whether or not the fluctuation effect during execution becomes a big hit.

Next, as a result of the look-ahead processing, it is determined whether there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the pending variable effect or whether the variable effect that is being executed is a big hit (S1335), and the variable effect that is pending is in the pending effect. If there is no variable effect that becomes a big hit and it is judged that the variable effect that is being executed does not become a big hit (out of order) (S1335: No), the notification display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process. ..

On the other hand, as a result of the look-ahead processing, if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the pending variable effect, or if it is determined that the variable effect being executed becomes a big hit (S1335: Yes), the jackpot notification command is issued. Set (S1336). The jackpot notification command is a command for displaying the jackpot notification image shown in FIG. 9A on the third symbol display device 81 to the display control device 114, and the jackpot is included in the pending fluctuation effect. When it is determined by the look-ahead process that there is a variable effect, the information for specifying the number of times the variable effect that becomes a big hit is held (the reserved ball that becomes a big hit) is included.

The jackpot notification command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. By transmitting the jackpot notification command to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 changes the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 from black to gold and displays it. By doing so, the control to display the jackpot notification image is executed.

As described above, the jackpot notification image is included in the variable effect during execution and the variable effect on hold while the player presses the notification button 23 for 1 second or longer to perform the notification based on the pressing operation. It is an image displayed when there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit. If there is no jackpot variation effect in both the running variation effect and the pending variation effect, the jackpot notification image is not displayed and the color of the boy's hair HB in the small area Ds2 remains black. Therefore, the player presses the notification button 23 for 1 second or longer and confirms whether the color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 remains black or changes to gold. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit among the variable effect and the pending variable effect. Therefore, when the player wants to stop the game and leave the seat, or when he / she wants to complete a message such as a call or an email by a mobile phone, the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for 1 second or longer to execute the execution. To know if there is a big hit variable effect in the variable effect and the pending variable effect, and if there is no big hit variable effect, to perform an act such as leaving the seat or completing the business, a game The player can make a decision to stop immediately. Further, if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit, the player can make a decision to continue the game until the big hit. That is, the notification button 23 can be used to determine whether or not the player may immediately execute the action when he / she wants to leave the seat or complete the business.

In the process of S1337 following the process of S1336, it is determined whether or not the ball launch stop flag 223g is on (S1337), and if the ball launch stop flag 223g is off (S1337; No), the notification display setting process is terminated as it is. And return to the notification process. On the other hand, if the ball launch stop flag 223g is on (S1337: Yes), first, the remaining fluctuation time (the remaining fluctuation time time from that point to the end of the fluctuation effect) in the running variation effect is calculated. (S1338). The remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect during execution is determined from the fluctuation time determined based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation pattern command. It is calculated by reducing the elapsed time from the start of the variable effect being executed.

Next, for the pending variation effect, the variation time is calculated for each variation effect (S1339). Each variation time of the pending variation effect is calculated based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b. In the present embodiment, the variable time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the big hit lottery is performed). Therefore, when calculating each fluctuation time of the pending variation effect, the number of reserved balls is started when the execution of each pending variation effect is started based on the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a at the time of calculation. It is done after calculating how many is.

Then, the variable time notification command is set (S1340), the notification display setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process. The variation time notification command is for notifying the display control device 114 of the remaining variation time of the running variation effect calculated in the process of S1338 and each variation time of the pending variation effect calculated in the process of S1339. It is a command. The variable time notification command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process.

When the fluctuation time notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the fluctuation time notification image shown in FIG. 9B is used to notify the player of each fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation time notification command. The display control device 114 controls the display on the third symbol display device 81 together with the jackpot notification image. By displaying this fluctuation time notification image together with the jackpot notification image on the third symbol display device 81, the player not only grasps whether or not there is a fluctuation effect that becomes a jackpot, but also immediately makes a jackpot. You can grasp the time until it becomes. Therefore, the player can immediately decide whether or not he / she has time to leave the seat or finish the work, considering the time until the latest big hit.

In addition, since the fluctuation time (the remaining fluctuation time in the current fluctuation production) is displayed for each fluctuation effect until the latest big hit, the player can see which variation effect is being executed. It is also possible to make a decision as to whether or not to leave the room or complete the business.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable time notification image is displayed together with the jackpot notification image only when it is determined that the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped. This is because, as described above, when calculating each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect, there is no possibility of winning the first ball opening 64, so that the number of reserved balls does not change. Even if the variable time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the effect is started (strictly speaking, when the jackpot lottery is performed), each variable time of the pending variable effect is surely determined. This is because it can be calculated. Conversely, in the present embodiment, the variable time notification image is hidden together with the jackpot notification image unless it is determined that the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped. Therefore, since the launch of the ball into the game area is not stopped, it is possible to prevent the inaccurate fluctuation time from being displayed for the pending fluctuation effect, so that the player can leave the seat or complete the task. It is possible to prevent erroneous judgment as to whether or not there is time.

Even if the launch of the ball into the game area is not stopped, it is pending on the assumption that there is no prize in the first ball opening 64 (there is no hold of a new variable effect). Each fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect may be calculated and the fluctuation time notification image may be displayed. As a result, even if the launch of the ball into the game area is not stopped, the time until the player becomes a big hit is predicted to some extent, and it is judged whether or not there is time to leave the seat or finish the work. Can be done. In this case, while the launch of the ball is not stopped, a character such as "(expected)" is written on the right side of each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect displayed on the fluctuation time notification image, or it is pending. The brightness of the characters of each fluctuation time of the fluctuation time may be dimmed so that the player can understand that each is a value based on the assumption. Then, when it is determined that the launch of the ball has been stopped, the character "(expected)" is deleted or the brightness of the character is displayed brightly, and the pending time is displayed on the variable time notification image. The player may be shown that each variation time of the variation effect is an accurate value.

Further, if the variation time (variation pattern) of the variation effect determined at the start of the variation effect is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls at that time, the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped. Even if this is not the case, the look-ahead process can correctly calculate each variation time of the pending variation effect. Therefore, in this case, by omitting the processing of S1337 and executing the processing of S1338 to S1340 after the processing of S1336, the big hit regardless of whether or not the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped. When the notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the variable time notification image may also be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29 (a), the details of the notification stop determination process (S1205), which is one of the notification processes, will be described. FIG. 29A is a flowchart showing the notification stop determination process (S1205).

In the notification stop determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification execution flag 223d is on (S1351), and if the notification execution flag 223d is off (S1351: No), the notification stop determination process is terminated as it is and the notification process is performed. Return to. On the other hand, when the notification execution flag 223d is on (S1351: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the notification execution counter 223e is 5000 (S1352).

If the notification execution counter 223e is not 5000 (S1352: No), 1 is added to the notification execution count 223e (S1355), the notification stop determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process. By the process of S1355, while the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is being executed, the notification execution counter 223e is incremented by 1 from the start of the execution until the value of the notification execution counter 223e reaches 5000. .. Here, since the notification process in which the notification stop determination process is executed is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process, the time during which the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed is determined. It is counted every 1 millisecond by the notification execution counter 223e for 5000 milliseconds (5 seconds).

As a result of the processing of S1352, if the notification execution counter 223e is 5000 (S1352: Yes), the notification stop command is set (S1353), the notification execution flag 223d is set to off (S1354), and the notification stop determination process is performed. Finish and return to the notification process. When the execution of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is continued for 5 seconds by the processing of S1353 and S1354, the execution of the notification is terminated.

The notification stop command notifies the display control device 114 of the stop of the execution of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, and the jackpot notification image indicating the existence of the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the fluctuation time. This is a command to end the display of the notification image. The notification stop command set by the process of S1353 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. When the display control device 114 receives the notification stop command to display the jackpot notification image or the fluctuation time notification image on the third symbol display device, the display control device 114 controls to stop the display of these images.

Next, the details of the notification button invalidation release process (S1206) will be described with reference to FIG. 29 (b). FIG. 29B is a flowchart showing the notification button invalidation release process (S1206).

In the notification button invalidation release process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification button invalidation flag 223h is on (S1361). If the notification button invalid flag 223h is off (S1361: No), it is not the invalid period of the pressing operation of the notification button 23, so the notification button invalidation cancellation process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process. On the other hand, if the notification button invalid flag 223h is on (S1361: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation command flag 223i is on (S1362).

If the confirmation command flag 223i is off (S1362: No), the notification button invalidation processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag 223i is on (S1362: Yes), the confirmation command flag 223i is set to off (S1363), and then it is determined whether or not the reserved ball count counter 223a is 0 (S1364). As a result, if the reserved ball number counter 223a is not 0 (S1364: No), the notification button invalidation processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification processing. On the other hand, if the reserved ball count counter 223a is 0 (S1364: Yes), the notification button invalidation flag 223h is set to off (S12364), the notification button invalidation cancellation process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process.

Here, if the confirmation command flag 223i is on, that is, if the hold count counter 223a is 0 when the confirmation command is received from the main control unit 110, the execution of all fluctuation effects including the hold is completed. , Means that the pending fluctuation effect has become 0. That is, in the present embodiment, after the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is set to be invalid, all the variable effects including the reserved portion (including the variable effect that is held after the invalid setting is made) are performed. When the execution is completed and the pending fluctuation effect disappears, the notification button invalidation flag 223h is set to off, and the invalidation of the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is canceled.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated until the pending fluctuation effect becomes 0. That is, even if the notification button 23 is pressed during that period, the notification is not executed. As a result, according to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, for example, when a player leaves the gaming machine, even if a person other than the player presses the notification button 23, at least the pachinko machine In No. 10, until the pending variation effect becomes 0, it is possible to prevent a person other than the player from grasping whether or not there is a variation effect that becomes a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to protect the interests of those who originally played the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 40, each process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when this is done. The V-interrupt signal is a signal transmitted by the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V-interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds to complete the drawing process of the image for one frame. do.

Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (a). FIG. 30A is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

In this main process, the initial setting process is executed (S1401). Specifically, a process of clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen.

Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup has started normally.

After the process of S1401, the interrupt permission is set (S1402), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (b). FIG. 30B is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1501), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process (S1602) of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (c). FIG. 30C is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 13) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. By executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. .. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other figures. In the V interrupt process, first, the command determination process (S1602) is executed, and then the display setting process (S1603) is executed. In the command determination process (S1602), the content of the command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the detailed variation pattern corresponds to the detailed variation pattern. The variable display data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34.

In the display setting process (S1603), the address indicated by the pointer 233c is defined based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b by the command determination process (S1602) or the like. According to the drawn content, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specifically specified.

Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 39.

After the display setting process (S1603) is executed, the task process is then executed (S1604). In this task process, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S1603). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S1605). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 13 is generated from the types of various sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S1604), and the drawing list is generated. It is transmitted to the image controller 237. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S1606). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S1606, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front / rear out reach, front / rear deviation other than The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete deviation) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S1402), which is one process of the V interrupt process, will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34. First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination process. The command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S1701), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S1701: No), the command determination process is terminated. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S1701: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S1603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S1702), and then For all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S1703).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a hold ball number command for display among the unprocessed commands (S1704), and if there is a hold ball number command for display (S1704: Yes), the hold ball number command process is performed. Is executed (S1705), and the process returns to the process of S1701.

Here, the details of the reserved ball number command processing (S1705) will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a). FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This hold ball number command process executes the process corresponding to the display hold ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hold ball number command process, first, the new hold ball number command flag is turned on (S1801). The new reserved ball count command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1603) that the display reserved ball count command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the information on the number of reserved balls included in the display reserved ball number command is acquired (S1802). If two or more display hold ball count commands are stored in the command buffer area in the process of S1802, the hold ball count information is acquired from the display hold ball count command stored last. As a result, the latest information on the number of reserved balls can be obtained.

Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the process of S1802 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to the other number of reserved balls are turned off. (S1803), the process returns to the command determination process. In the display setting process, when the new number of reserved balls command flag is on, by referring to the number determination flag, the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag for which the on is set is the reserved ball. The reserved image data is expanded so as to be displayed in the number display area Db.

Returning to FIG. 31, when it is determined that there is no display reserved ball count command in the processing of S1704 (S1704: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. Then (S1706), if there is a confirmation command for display (S1706: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S1707), and the process returns to the process of S1701.

Here, the details of the confirmation command processing (S1707) will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b). FIG. 32B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command processing. This confirmation command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the confirmation command process (S1707), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S1811), and this processing is terminated. The confirmation command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1603) that a display confirmation command has been received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmation display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. .. Further, if the confirmation command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variation effect has elapsed after processing the display setting of the variation effect, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As shown, the display setting process is executed.

Returning to FIG. 31, when it is determined that there is no display confirmation command in the processing of S1706 (S1706: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands (S1706: No). If there is a display demo command (S1708: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S1709), and the process returns to the process of S1701.

Here, the details of the demo command processing (S1709) will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (c). FIG. 32 (c) is a flowchart showing demo command processing. This demo command process executes the process corresponding to the display demo command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the demo command process (S1709), first, the demo display data table corresponding to the demo effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S1821). Next, the Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233b and its contents are cleared (S1822).

Next, the time data corresponding to the demo effect displayed in the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233e (S1823), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1824). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to off, the demo display flag is set to on, and the confirmation display flag is set to off (S1825), and the process returns to the command determination process. The demo display flag is a flag indicating that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmation display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state.

By executing this demo command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the processing of S1824, from the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S1821. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. Further, in the display setting process, the time of the demo effect specified in the demo display data table is timed by using the timed counter 233e in which the time data corresponding to the demo effect is set by the process of S1823, and the process of S1825 is performed. When it is determined by the timing of the display setting control time counting counter 233e that the demonstration effect in the demo display data table has been completed based on the states of the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag set by, the next effect to be displayed. As a result, control is performed so that the demo effect is displayed again.

If both the confirmed command and the demo command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-mentioned confirmed command process (S1707) is executed first and the confirmed command flag is turned on. After being set, this demo command process (S1709) is executed, and the confirmation command flag is turned off by the process of S1825.

As a result, in such a case, the demo effect is displayed without performing the final display effect. The main control device 110 is configured to transmit a demo command if the start timing of the variation effect does not come after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the confirmation command is transmitted. , The confirmation command and the demo command cannot be stored together in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command judgment process. Therefore, if any of these commands is stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, it is highly possible that the commands are not transmitted / received normally.

In such a case, the display control device 114 gives priority to the demo effect not directly related to the game and displays it on the third symbol display device 81, so that the erroneous definite display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a misunderstanding about the game result. Further, by starting the demo effect without performing the final display effect, the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call a person involved in the hall and request a countermeasure.

Returning to FIG. 31, when it is determined that there is no display demo command in the processing of S1708 (S1708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. (S1710) If there is a display variation pattern command (S1710: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S1711), and the process returns to the process of S1701.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S1711) will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (a). FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, based on the variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command for display, one detailed variation pattern is selected from a plurality of detailed variation patterns in which the variation effect is executed at the variation time. The variation pattern is determined (S1831). The detailed variation pattern determined here uniquely determines the content of the advance notice effect performed during the variation effect.

Next, the determined details are read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S1832).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S1832, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time Set the table in the display data table buffer 233a.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233a, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control. When instructed by the device 110, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is given from the main control device 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table. ) Will be received, and the changing third symbol will be suddenly stopped and displayed, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233a as in the present embodiment, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having the variation time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233a is completed, the confirmation command from the main control device 110 is completed. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display confirmation command) is received, the player visually recognizes the restart effect as a part of the variable effect. , The change of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 can be continued without discomfort until the stop display of the third symbol is confirmed.

Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233b (S1833). Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S1832, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233e (S1834). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1835), and the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to off (S1836).

By setting the demo display flag and the final display flag to off, the third symbol display device 81 can display the variable effect instead of the demo effect and the final display effect being displayed. If both the confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination processing, the above-mentioned confirmation command processing (S1707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag is executed. Is set to on, but then this variation pattern command processing (S1711) is executed, and the confirmation command flag is turned off by the processing of S1836.

When the processing of S1836 is completed, the restart timer counter used in the display setting processing is initialized to 0 (S1837), and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S1835 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S1832 is executed. From, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counter 233e in which the variation time data is set by the process of S1834, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is measured. If it is determined that the confirmation command has been completed, the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received. Further, if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within a predetermined time after the end of the variation effect, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command is prioritized, the display is used. Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command judgment process, the presence or absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, so that the confirmation command processing, which is the process corresponding to the display confirmation command, is always executed first, while the display is displayed. The process corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed later, and the confirmation command flag set by the confirmation command for display can be set to off by overwriting as in the process of S1836. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, it is for display. Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command judgment process, the presence or absence of the display demo command is determined first, so that the demo command process, which is the process corresponding to the display demo command, is always executed first, while the display is displayed. The process corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed later, and the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display demo command is rewritten to the variation display data table by overwriting as in the process of S1832. Can be done. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 31, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the processing of S1710 (S1710: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a stop type command for display (S1712: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S1713), and the process returns to the process of S1701.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S1713) will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (b). FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front-back off reach, reach other than front-back loss, or complete loss) is supported. The stop type table is determined (S1841), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 30C) is executed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S1842).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S1842 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it to off (S1843) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, the processing of S1842 is performed as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time. The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S1604), after the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S1842 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S1843, and the identification thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S1841, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S1842. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even if it is completely out of order.

Here, if the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually off. , The player misunderstands that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become a big hit, and there is a risk that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be lowered. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in fact, if it is a big hit, the completely disengaged stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 31, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S1712 (S1712: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot notification command among the unprocessed commands (S1712: No). S1714) If there is a jackpot notification command (S1714: Yes), the jackpot notification command process is executed (S1715), and the process returns to the process of S1701.

Here, the details of the jackpot notification command processing (S1715) will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing the jackpot notification command processing. This jackpot notification command process executes a process corresponding to the jackpot notification command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot notification command, first, the jackpot notification command flag is set to ON (S1851). Here, the jackpot notification command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1603) that the jackpot notification command has been processed in the ON state.

Next, the jackpot notification command acquires information for identifying the reserved ball that becomes a jackpot (S1852). Then, for the reserved ball jackpot flag that is provided for each reserved ball and indicates that the reserved ball will be a jackpot when it is on, it corresponds to the reserved ball that becomes a jackpot specified from the information acquired by the processing of S1852. The reserved ball jackpot flag to be held is set to on, the reserved ball jackpot flag corresponding to other reserved balls is set to off (S1853), and the process returns to the command determination process.

If the jackpot notification command in S1852 does not include information for specifying a reserved ball to be a jackpot, it means that the jackpot will be a jackpot in the running variation effect. Therefore, in this case, in the process of S1853, the hold ball jackpot flag corresponding to all the hold balls is set to off.

In the display setting process, when the jackpot notification command is on, a jackpot notification image (an image of a boy whose hair HB is "golden") indicating the existence of a jackpot is displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81. The image data for jackpot notification is expanded so as to be performed. At the same time, based on the reserved ball jackpot flag, the jackpot reserved image data is developed so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is displayed in "red" in the reserved ball number display area Db.

Returning to FIG. 31, when it is determined that there is no jackpot notification command in the processing of S1714 (S1714: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a variable time notification command among the unprocessed commands (S1716). ), If there is a variable time notification command (S1716: Yes), the variable time notification command process is executed (S1717), and the process returns to the process of S1701.

Here, the details of the variable time notification command processing (S1717) will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 34B is a flowchart showing the variable time notification command processing. This variable time notification command process executes the process corresponding to the variable time notification command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variable time notification command, first, the variable time notification command flag is set to ON (S1861). Here, the variable time notification command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1603) that the variable time notification command has been processed in the ON state.

Next, from the information included in the variable time notification command, the remaining variable time of the variable effect being executed and each variable time of the pending variable effect are acquired and stored in the work RAM 233 (S1862), and the command determination process is performed. Return to.

In the display setting process, when the variable time notification command is on, the variable time notification image that displays the remaining time of the variable effect being executed and each variable time of the pending variable effect is the third symbol display device 81. The image data for notifying the fluctuation time is expanded so as to be displayed in the small area Ds3.

Returning to FIG. 31, when it is determined that there is no variable time notification command in the processing of S1716 (S1716: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a notification stop command among the unprocessed commands (S1718). ), If there is a notification stop command (S1718: Yes), the notification stop command process is executed (S1719), and the process returns to the process of S1701.

Here, the details of the notification stop command processing (S1719) will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (c). FIG. 34 (c) is a flowchart showing the notification stop command processing. This notification stop command processing executes the processing corresponding to the notification stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the notification stop command, the notification stop command flag is set to ON (S1871), and the process returns to the notification command. Here, the notification stop command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1603) that the notification stop command has been processed in the ON state. In the display setting process, when the notification stop command is on, the jackpot notification image and the fluctuation time notification image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are erased (hidden). Delete the image data for notification, the image data for holding the jackpot, and the image data for fluctuating time notification.

Returning to FIG. 31, when it is determined that there is no notification stop command in the process of S1718 (S1718: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S1722), and the process returns to the process of S1701. .. In the process of S1722, for example, if a continuous advance notice command instructing the start of the continuous advance notice effect is received from the voice lamp control device 113, an additional data table corresponding to the mode of the continuous advance notice effect indicated by the command is added. It is read from the data table storage area 232b and stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. As a result, in the display setting process, the continuous notice effect is displayed for the image displayed according to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a according to the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. The control to be displayed on the device 81 is executed.

In the processing of S1701 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S1701: Yes). ), The processing of S1702 to S1722 is executed again. Then, the processes of S1701 to S1722 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S1701 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area (S1701: No). ), Ends this command judgment process.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 39, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S1603), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIGS. 35 and 36 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 35, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S1901), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S1901: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S1902 to S1910 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1911. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S1901: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S1902), S1903 to Each process of S1910 executes the process corresponding to the new command.

In the process of S1903, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S1903), and if the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S1903: Yes), it is for display in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the hold ball count command has been processed, and the hold image setting process is executed (S1904).

Here, the details of the reserved image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (a). FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. In this hold image setting process, the third symbol display device 81 displays the hold ball number symbols corresponding to the number of hold balls notified from the voice lamp control device 113 in accordance with the processing of the hold ball number command for display. Therefore, it is a process for expanding the image data.

In the hold image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number determination flag set to be turned on is displayed in the hold ball number display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 ( The reserved image data to be displayed in (see FIG. 4) is expanded (S1951). In the task processing (S1604), based on the expanded reserved image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the reserved image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

In the hold image setting process, after the process of S1951, the new hold ball number command is set to off (S1952), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 35, when it is determined that the new reserved ball count command flag is off after the hold image setting process (S1904) or in the process of S1903 (S1903: No), then the jackpot notification command flag is set. If it is determined whether or not it is on (S1905) and the jackpot notification command flag is on (S1905: Yes), it is determined that the jackpot notification command has been processed in the previous command determination process, and the jackpot notification image setting process is executed. (S1906).

Here, the details of the jackpot notification image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (b). FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the jackpot notification image setting process. This jackpot notification image setting process is for expanding the image data in order to display the jackpot notification image shown in FIG. 9A on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the jackpot notification command. It is the processing of.

In the jackpot notification image setting process, first, as a jackpot notification image indicating the existence of a jackpot, a jackpot notification image for displaying an image of a boy whose hair HB is "golden" in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 is used. Expand the image data (S1961). In the task processing (S1604), based on the developed image data for the jackpot notification, "a boy whose hair HB color is" golden "" is specified as the type of sprite (display object) constituting the jackpot notification image. Instead of the "boy whose hair HB color is" black "" specified in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, "the hair HB Determine the various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle for displaying the "boy whose color is" golden "".

Next, the reserved ball jackpot flag provided for each reserved ball is referred to, and the reserved ball number symbol of the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved ball jackpot flag set to be turned on is displayed in "red". Is expanded (S1962). In the task processing (S1604), based on the expanded jackpot reserved image data, the "red" reserved ball number symbol is specified as the type of sprite (display object), and the "blue" reserved ball number symbol is specified. Instead of, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle for displaying the reserved ball number symbol of the target reserved ball in "red" are determined.

In the process of S1962, if the hold ball jackpot flag corresponding to all the hold balls is off, the variable effect during execution becomes a jackpot, so the hold image data for the jackpot is not expanded, and S1963 Move to processing.

After the processing of S1962, the jackpot notification command flag is set to off (S1963), and the process returns to the display setting processing.

Returning to FIG. 35, when it is determined that the jackpot notification command flag is off after the jackpot notification image setting process (S1906) or in the process of S1905 (S1905: No), then the variable time notification command flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is on (S1907). Then, if the variable time notification command flag is on (S1907: Yes), it is determined that the variable time notification command has been processed in the previous command determination process, and the variable time notification image setting process is executed (S1908).

Here, the details of the variable time notification image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (a). FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation time notification image setting process. In this fluctuation time notification image setting process, in order to display the fluctuation time notification image shown in FIG. 9B on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the fluctuation time notification command, the image data is displayed. It is a process for expanding.

In the variable time notification image setting process, first, the remaining variable time of the variable effect being executed and each variable time of the pending variable effect stored in the work RAM 233 by the process for the variable time notification command are referred to, and the variable time notification image setting process is referred to. Expands the variation time notification image data for displaying the variation time notification image that displays the remaining time of the variation effect being executed and each variation time of the pending variation effect in the small area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. (S1966). Then, the notification stop command flag is set to off (S1967), and the process returns to the display setting process.

In the task process (S1604), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the variable time notification image is specified based on the variable time notification image data developed by the process of S1966. Then, in place of or superimposed on the sprite displayed in the small area Ds3 defined by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Therefore, in order to display the fluctuation time notification image in the small area Ds3, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite constituting the fluctuation time notification image.

Returning to FIG. 35, when it is determined that the variable time notification command flag is off after the variable time notification image setting process (S1908) or in the process of S1907 (S1907: No), then the notification stop command flag is displayed. Judges whether or not is on (S1909). Then, if the notification stop command flag is on (S1909: Yes), it is determined that the notification stop command has been processed in the previous command determination process, and the notification image erasing process is executed (S1910).

Here, the details of the notification image erasing process will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (b). FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the notification image erasing process. This notification image erasing process is a process for erasing the jackpot notification image and the variable time notification image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the notification stop command.

In the notification image erasing process, first, the jackpot notification image data and the jackpot holding image data developed by the jackpot notification image setting process (S1906), and the variable time notification developed by the variable time notification image setting process (S1908). Image data is deleted (S1971). Then, the notification stop command flag is set to off (S1972), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Since the jackpot notification image data, the jackpot holding image data, and the fluctuation time notification image data are deleted by the processing of S1971, the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the reception of the notification stop command. The notification image and the fluctuation time notification image are deleted.

Returning to FIG. 35, whether the notification image erasing process (S1910) is completed, whether the notification stop command flag is determined to be off in the processing of S1909 (S1909: No), or a new command in the processing of S1901 When it is determined that the flag is off (S1901: No), the pointer update process is then executed (S1911).

Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process updates the pointer 233c that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing contents should be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, respectively. It is a process to perform.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233c (S1981). That is, in principle, the pointer 233c is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is the display data table. When the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the buffer 233a, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that each data table is in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from.

After updating the value of the pointer 233c by the process of S1981, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c is End information. (S1982). As a result, if it is End information (S1982: Yes), it means that the pointer 233c has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is a demo display data table or a restart display data table (S1983), and the demo display data table or restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S1983: Yes), the pointer 233c is set to 1 (S1984), and further, it corresponds to the effect time of the demo display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. The time data is set in the time counter 233e (S1985), and the process proceeds to S1987. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table or the restart display data table, so that the demo effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1983, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is neither the demo display data table nor the restart display data table (S1983: No), the pointer 233c is used. The value is subtracted by 1 (S1986), and the process proceeds to S1987. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a variable display data table or a definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, , Since the drawing content of the previous address in which the End information is described is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 is made to display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

As a result of the processing of S1982, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, when it is determined that the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233c after the update by the processing of S1981 is not End information (S1982: No. ), The processing of S1983 to S1986 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S1987.

In the processing of S1987, it is determined whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S1987), and if the confirmation command flag is not on but off (S1987: No), the pointer update processing is terminated and the display is set. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S1987: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, and thus the display data table buffer. The value of the pointer 233c is set to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233a (S1988), and the value of the time counter is set to 1. (S1989), the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

Returning to FIG. 35, after the pointer update process (S1911), the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process is shown from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The drawing contents of the address are expanded (S1912). In the task process (S1604), the hold image developed by the hold image setting process (S1904), the jackpot notification image developed by the jackpot notification image setting process (S1906), and the variable time notification image setting process (S1908) are used. The type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S1912 together with the fluctuation time notification image developed in the above process, and the display coordinate position and enlargement ratio are specified for each sprite. , Determine various parameters required for drawing such as rotation angle.

If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. Whenever the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, the Null data will be expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

After the processing of S1912, the value of the timekeeping counter 233e is subtracted by 1 (S1913), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233e after the subtraction is 0 or less (S1914). If the value of the timekeeping counter 233e is 1 or more (S1914: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233e is 0 or less (S1914: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is sent from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S1915, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S1915).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S1915: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, first stop. The mode of the definite display effect according to the stop symbol indicated by the symbol discrimination flag is determined, the definite display data table of the mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and the Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents are cleared (S1916). Next, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the confirmation display is set in the time counter 233e (S1917), and the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1918). Then, after the confirmation command flag is set to off (S1919) and then the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S1920), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is used as it is in the work RAM 233. It is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in (S1921), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a confirmation command (display confirmation) is given from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the final symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S1921 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, since the display of the third symbol in the variation effect starts from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, the variation based on the data table starts in the variation display data table. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the elapse of a predetermined time is specified. In the task process (S1604), the stop symbol in the previous variation effect is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S1921 until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation. Then, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information specified in the above-mentioned variable display data table to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is off instead of on in the processing of S1915 (S1915: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S1922 shown in FIG. 36, and it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S1922). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S1922: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S1914 (S1914: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. Later (S1923), the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S1924), and then the time data corresponding to the production time of the demo effect displayed in the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233e. Set (S1925). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1926), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S1927), and the display setting process is terminated.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demo effect command indicating the start of the demo effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, the display automatically. The drawing content can be set so that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The branching condition of S1922: Yes is satisfied when the definite display effect is performed. In this case, the content of the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared by the processing of S1916. Therefore, in the process of S1924, the process of clearing those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced. However, the process of clearing the additional data table buffer 233b may be executed in the process of S1924.

In the process of S1922, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S1922: No), then it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S1928). If the demo display flag is on (S1928: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S1914 (S1914: Yes) means that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is, and V Return to interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1928, when the demo display flag is not on but off (S1928: No), the result of the determination in the process of S1914 (S1914: Yes) means that the variation effect is completed. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the variation effect, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect is set in the display data table buffer 233a in order to start the restart effect. 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S1929), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has reached a predetermined value (S1930).

Then, when the restart timer counter is not a predetermined value (S1930: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. If the restart timer counter has a predetermined value (S1930: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b, and the contents thereof are written. Clear (S1931). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233e (S1932), the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1933), and the process returns to the V interruption process.

As a result, in the display control device 114, a confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect. If (display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as described above, the restart effect is an effect of displaying the image obtained by vibrating the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. By visually recognizing that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the change of is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol has not been determined at that time.

After the last drawing content specified by the restart display data table is expanded, the drawing content is expanded again from the beginning of the restart display data table by the pointer update process described above. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in a mode of vibrating (oscillating) the third symbol around a predetermined position, and in the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary for shaking and displaying at least once are specified. Then, by repeatedly expanding the drawing contents from the beginning of the restart display data table, the restart effect of repeatedly vibrating the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, by setting the restart effect to cause the third symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the third symbol, the restart display data table is shaken at least once for the third symbol. Since it is only necessary to store the drawing contents required for display, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be kept small.

Further, if a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S1916 shown in FIG. 35 is performed and the display data table buffer is performed. A definite display data table is set in 233a. As a result, even during the restart effect, the stop display of the third symbol is made with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol determination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the confirmation display effect is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed on.

Further, if a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2832 in FIG. 33A is performed and the display is performed. A variation display data table is set in the data table buffer 233a, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, if a display demo command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2821 in FIG. 32 (c) is performed and the display data is displayed. A display data table for demo is set in the table buffer 233a, and the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 that should be originally received is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol due to the end of the variation effect. Since it is an effect displayed in some cases, there is a possibility that the confirmation command is not received even while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise, malfunction, and the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if a display variation pattern command or a display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects on the third symbol display device 81 can be performed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S1605), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined by the task process (S1604) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α-blending information). , Color information, filter designation information) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 13 (S2001). That is, in the processing of S2001, the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S1604). Then, the specified address is associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as the drawing information (detailed information).

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag (not shown) are transmitted to the image controller (S2002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer provided in the video RAM 236 to expand the drawn image. When the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the drawn image to be expanded in the second frame buffer provided in the video RAM.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag after the processing of S2002 (S2003). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and to "0" if it is "1". Will be. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer of the video RAM 236 each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 30C) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame, and the image is drawn. When the processing and display processing are executed, the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is specified. The first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer from which information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. .. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are alternately designated as the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer, respectively, every 20 milliseconds. This makes it possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable effect during execution becomes a big hit or the variable effect on hold is triggered by the player pressing the notification button 23. When there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit, a big hit notification image that announces the existence of the big hit is displayed. As a result, the player presses the notification button 23 and displays the notification image when the player wants to stop the game and leave the seat, or when he / she wants to complete a message such as a call or e-mail by a mobile phone. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit among the variable effect being executed and the variable effect being held. Therefore, if there is no variable effect that is a big hit, the player can make a decision to immediately stop the game in order to perform an act such as leaving the seat or completing the business. Further, if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit, the player can make a decision to continue the game until the big hit. That is, the notification button 23 can be used to determine whether or not the player may immediately execute the action when he / she wants to leave the seat or complete the business.

Further, unless the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second), it is configured so that it is not notified whether or not there is a big hit variation effect in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect. ing. Unless there are special circumstances such as when you want to stop the game and leave the seat, or when you want to finish a call, email, etc. by mobile phone, before the player confirms the variable effect being executed or Knowing whether any of these will be a big hit before the pending variable effect is executed will result in deprivation of the enjoyment of the game. The player notifies whether or not there is a big hit variation effect in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect only after the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second). If the notification button 23 is touched unintentionally and the touching time is less than the predetermined time, whether or not the jackpot is included in either the running fluctuation effect or the pending variation effect. , Can be suppressed from being known to the player.

Also, if it is determined that there is a variable effect that will be a big hit in the pending variable effect, in the jackpot notification image, which variable effect that will be the big hit is pending, that is, the reserved ball that will be the big hit. Is configured to be notified to the player. As a result, if the player can grasp that there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the running variation effect and the pending variable effect, will it be a big hit immediately or will there be some time before it becomes a big hit? In addition, you can also know how many times the remaining fluctuation production will be performed until it becomes a big hit. Therefore, based on such information, the player can determine whether or not he / she has time to leave the seat or finish the work before the big hit.

Further, when the notification button 23 is pressed by the player for 1 second or longer and there is a big hit variation effect in the running variation effect or the pending variation effect, the notification button 23 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Along with the jackpot notification image, a variable time notification image that displays the remaining variable time of the variable effect being executed and each variable time of the pending variable effect is displayed. As a result, the player can not only grasp whether or not there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit, but also grasp the time until the big hit. Therefore, the player can immediately decide whether or not he / she has time to leave the seat or finish the work in consideration of the time until the big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time (the remaining variation time in the executing variation effect) is displayed for each variation effect until the jackpot is reached, so that the player can execute which variation effect. You can also make decisions such as whether to leave your seat or complete your business while you are there.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

In the above embodiment, if there is a big hit in the variable effect being executed or the variable effect being held when the notification button 23 is pressed, the case where the big hit notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. However, when the notification button 23 is pressed, if there is no jackpot in either the running variation effect or the pending variation effect (that is, any variation effect is off). (B), the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an off-notification image (for example, an image in which the color of the hair HB of a normally black boy changes to white) indicating to the player that there is no jackpot. May be good. In this configuration, if there is a big hit in the variable effect being executed or the variable effect being held when the notification button 23 is pressed, the big hit notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured as. As a result, when the player presses the notification button 23, the jackpot notification image is displayed or the missed notification image is displayed, and the jackpot is included in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect. It is possible to grasp at a glance whether or not there is an image. On the other hand, when the notification button 23 is pressed and there is no big hit in either the running variation effect or the pending variation effect, the missed notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When configured to display, when there is a press operation of the notification button 23, and there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the variable effect being executed and the variable effect being held, nothing is notified. You may. As a result, if no notification is made when the player presses the notification button 23, there is an expectation that there will be a big hit variation effect in the running variation effect or the pending variation effect. Can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, as the jackpot notification image, a case where an image for changing the color of the boy's hair HB displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from normal black to gold is displayed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, a predetermined character may appear as a jackpot notification image, or the color and shape of the third symbol that is variably displayed (for example, the color of the wooden box or the color of the number displayed on the front of the wooden box) may be displayed. It may be changed. Further, the effect may be displayed around the third symbol, or the color of the back image or the speed at which the back image flows may be changed. Further, a small jackpot notification image may be displayed in a corner or the like of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the jackpot notification image in a small size, it is possible to make it difficult for a person other than the player to visually recognize the jackpot notification image, and it is easy to prevent others from knowing the existence of the jackpot.

In addition, the existence of a big hit may be announced only by the number of reserved balls. In this case, the existence of the jackpot may be announced by changing all the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db from the normal blue color to red. Further, as in the above embodiment, when the variable effect in which the number of pending times is X (0 ≦ X ≦ 4) is a big hit among the pending variable effects, the number of reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db. Among the symbols, the Xth reserved ball number symbol from the left may be displayed in red, and the other reserved ball number symbols may be displayed in blue to announce the existence of a big hit. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of which of the pending variable effects is the big hit. At this time, if the variable effect being executed is a big hit, the variable effect being executed becomes a big hit by displaying a part or all of the reserved ball number symbols in yellow, which is different from red or blue. You may notify the player of this.

Further, by displaying only the variable time notification image on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the jackpot notification image, the player can indicate that there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the running variation effect or the pending variation effect. You may notify to. In this case, even if the launch of the ball to the game area is not stopped, as a result of executing the look-ahead process based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the variable effect being executed or the variable effect being held is a big hit. If there is a variation effect, the variation time notification image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At this time, if the variable time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the big hit lottery is performed), the ball is launched into the game area. If it is not stopped, the holding time cannot be calculated correctly for the pending variable effect because the number of reserved balls when the variable effect is actually started is undecided. Therefore, in this case, even if the launch of the ball into the game area is not stopped, it is assumed that there is no winning of the first ball opening 64 (there is no reservation of a new variable effect). Each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect may be calculated and the fluctuation time notification image may be displayed. As a result, even if the launch of the ball into the game area is not stopped, the time until the player becomes a big hit is predicted to some extent, and it is judged whether or not there is time to leave the seat or finish the work. Can be done. In this case, while the launch of the ball is not stopped, a character such as "(expected)" is written on the right side of each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect displayed on the fluctuation time notification image, or it is pending. The brightness of the characters at each fluctuation time of the fluctuation time may be dimmed so that the player can understand that each is a value based on the assumption. Then, when it is determined that the launch of the ball has been stopped, the character "(expected)" is deleted or the brightness of the character is displayed brightly, and the pending time is displayed on the variable time notification image. The player may be shown that each variation time of the variation effect is an accurate value.

Further, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a case where the fluctuation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the fluctuation effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the big hit lottery is performed). If it is determined that the ball has been launched into the game area, it is stored in each of the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b as the fluctuation time of each pending variation effect. The shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 may be calculated and the fluctuation time notification image may be displayed. In this case, while the launch of the ball is not stopped, a character such as "or more" may be written on the right side of each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect displayed on the fluctuation time notification image. As a result, even if the launch of the ball into the game area is not stopped, at least the time it takes for the player to become a big hit can be grasped, so it is determined whether or not there is time to leave the seat or finish the work. be able to.

Further, when the variable time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the big hit lottery is performed), the number of reserved balls at that time is particularly high. When it is determined that the launch of the ball to the game area is stopped when the notification button 23 is pressed in a case where the fluctuation time tends to be determined to be short when the fluctuation time is large, the fluctuation time notification is performed. In the image, not only the fluctuation time (current fluctuation time) of each fluctuation effect when the state in which the launch of the ball is stopped is maintained, but also the look-ahead information first of the look-ahead information storage area 223b for each variation effect. The shortest fluctuation time (shortest fluctuation time) among the fluctuation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls is calculated based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each of the fourth areas, and the current fluctuation time is calculated. The shortest fluctuation time may be displayed together with. In this case, for the shortest fluctuation time, a character such as "or more" may be written on the right side thereof. As a result, when the player feels that it takes a long time to hit the jackpot based on the current fluctuation time, the shortest variation is how much the time to hit the jackpot can be shortened by launching the ball. Since it can be grasped based on the time, for example, it is possible to let the player make a decision to leave the seat or finish the business after launching the ball and establishing a big hit quickly.

Further, the existence of the jackpot may be notified not by the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 but by lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, or a variable display device separate from the illumination units 29 to 33. The notification may be made by lighting, blinking, or the like of a lamp provided on the unit 80 or the like. Further, the existence of the jackpot may be announced by making a predetermined sound sound, or by making a predetermined action on the accessory provided on the game board 13. In addition, a big hit can be achieved by displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81, lighting / blinking the illumination units 29 to 33 and other lamps, sounding, and operating a character. You may announce the existence.

In addition, even when it is announced that there is no big hit in the variable effect being executed and the variable effect being held, a predetermined character may appear as a missed notification image, or the third symbol to be variably displayed may appear. The color and shape may be changed. Further, the effect may be displayed around the third symbol, or the color of the back image or the speed at which the back image flows may be changed. Further, a small off notification image may be displayed in a corner or the like of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the missed notification image in a small size, it is possible to make it difficult for a person other than the player to visually recognize the missed notification image, and it is easy to prevent others from knowing the existence of the jackpot. In addition, by changing the color of a part or all of the reserved ball number symbol displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db from blue to gray, or by erasing the reserved ball number symbol for a predetermined time, the variable effect and the hold during execution are performed. You may announce that there is no big hit in the fluctuation production inside. Further, it may be notified by lighting / blinking or the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 instead of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that the jackpot does not exist, and it is variable separately from the illumination units 29 to 33. The notification may be made by lighting, blinking, or the like of a lamp provided on the display device unit 80 or the like. Further, it may be announced that the jackpot does not exist by making a predetermined sound sound, or by making a predetermined action on the accessory provided on the game board 13. In addition, a big hit can be obtained by combining two or more of the image display on the third symbol display device 81, the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and other lamps, the pronunciation of sound, and the operation of the accessory. You may announce that it does not exist.

In the above embodiment, the case where the presence of the jackpot is notified when the notification button 23 is pressed for 1 second or longer has been described, but instead, the notification button 23 is within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second). The existence of a big hit may be announced when the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times (for example, twice). As a result, when the player unintentionally touches the notification button 23 and the number of touches is less than the predetermined number of times within the predetermined time, the existence of the jackpot is not notified. Therefore, when the player does not intend, it is possible to suppress the player from knowing whether or not the variable effect being executed or the variable effect being held includes a big hit, and the interest of the game is maintained. be able to.

Further, when it is detected that the notification button 23 has been pressed, the existence of the jackpot may be notified immediately. As a result, the notification is made even if the player does not intend, but if the notification button 23 is pressed, the presence or absence of the jackpot can be immediately known, so that the player leaves the seat or needs a message. If you want to finish the action, you can decide faster whether or not you can perform the action immediately.

Further, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, the screen for selecting whether or not such notification may be performed is displayed instead of immediately notifying the existence of the jackpot. 3. It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81, and the player may be made to operate the frame button 22 or the like to select whether or not the notification may be performed. As a result, when the player misunderstands the function as another function and performs a predetermined pressing operation on the notification button, the player can be made aware of the misunderstanding. In addition, it is possible to suppress the announcement of the existence of a jackpot even though the player does not want it.

In the above embodiment, the case where the notification button 23 is provided on the right side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 in the front view has been described, but the notification button 23 may be arranged at a position different from that of the upper plate 17. For example, the lower plate unit 15 may be provided with the notification button 23, or the operation handle 51 may be provided with the notification button 23. By providing the frame button 22 at a position different from the upper plate 17 provided, it is possible to prevent the notification button 23 from being operated by mistake for the frame button 22. Further, by providing the notification button 23 in a place where the player does not normally operate the button, such as the lower plate unit 15, the player can be made aware that the notification button 23 is a special button. Further, if the notification button 23 is provided on the operation handle 51, the person who was originally playing the game is leaving the seat, and another person casually operates the notification button 23 to perform the variable effect during execution and pending. Even if you try to check if there is a variable effect that will be a big hit, you have to reach near the operation handle 51, so the appearance is conspicuous to the surrounding players and hall related people, so to other people You can hesitate to operate the notification button 23.

In the above embodiment, the notification button 23 is configured as a press operation type button, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any means may be used as long as it is a means operated by the player. For example, it may be configured by a sensor that detects the contact of a human hand, or may be configured by an operating lever. Further, it may be configured by a slide type switch. In the slide type switch, the switch may be urged in one direction. In this case, the player may be configured to announce the existence of a big hit when the player is slid in the direction opposite to the urging direction for a predetermined time or longer.

Further, the role of the notification button 23 may be given to a button having another function. For example, if the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) and there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the active and pending variable effect, a big hit notification image or a variable time notification is made. An image may be displayed. Further, the notification mode selection screen is displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22, and when the notification mode is selected by the player, if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the running and pending variable effects, a big hit. A notification image or a fluctuation time notification image may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed and the notification based on the pressing operation (notification of the existence of the jackpot) is started, the notification is made for 5 seconds regardless of whether or not the subsequent notification button 23 is pressed. However, instead of this, when the notification button 23 is pressed and the notification based on the pressing operation (notification of the existence of the jackpot) is started, the notification button 23 is continuously pressed. The notification may be made while the notification is continued, and the notification may be terminated when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is completed. As a result, the notification can be terminated at the player's will. In addition, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the notification more than necessary, and it is possible to suppress the possibility that a person other than the player will be informed of the presence or absence of the jackpot.

In the above embodiment, if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the variable effect being executed or pending based on the operation of pressing the notification button 23, a big hit notification image is displayed, and a ball to the game area is further displayed. When it is determined that the launch of the button is stopped, the case where the variable time notification image is displayed together with the jackpot notification image has been described. On the other hand, it is determined that the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped even if there is no variable effect that is a big hit in the variable effect being executed or held when the notification button 23 is pressed. Occasionally, it may be configured to display the variation time of each variation effect (the remaining variation time in the running variation effect). As a result, the variable time notification image is displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the variable time notification image that is a big hit. Therefore, even if another person other than the player visually recognizes the variable time notification image, the presence or absence of the variable time notification image that is a big hit to other people. Can be suppressed from being known.

In the above embodiment, when there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the variable effect being executed or pending based on the operation of pressing the notification button 23, the variable time notification image displayed together with the big hit notification image. Explained the case of displaying the fluctuation time of each fluctuation effect executed until the latest big hit (the remaining fluctuation time in the running fluctuation production), but the fluctuation time notification image is the latest big hit. It may display the variable time of the variable effect being executed and each variable time of all the pending variable effects including the subsequent variable effect. In this case, the variable time notification command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes information indicating the variable time of the variable effect being executed and each variable time of all the pending variable effects. It may be a thing. As a result, the player can know not only the time until the latest big hit, but also the time after the big hit until all the variable effects reserved at that time are executed. Therefore, the player can determine when to leave the seat or finish the work, including not only the time until the latest big hit, but also the time required for the fluctuation production after the big hit.

Further, in the variable time notification image, the time from that time to the latest big hit may be displayed. For example, if the number of hold times is a big hit in a variable effect of 2 times, the remaining variable time of the variable effect being executed, the variable time of the variable effect of 1 hold number, and the variable effect of 2 hold times. The total time of the fluctuation time may be displayed as the time until the latest big hit. As a result, the player can grasp the time until the big hit at a glance without totaling the fluctuation time of each fluctuation production, so that it is possible to judge whether there is time to leave or finish the work earlier. can.

Further, in the above embodiment, when there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the variable effect being executed or pending based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the variable time displayed together with the big hit notification image. Although the notification image is displayed, in this case, only the jackpot notification image may be displayed and the fluctuation time notification image may not be displayed. In this case, the player cannot know the time until the jackpot is reached, but the presence or absence of the jackpot can be grasped, so that when the player leaves the seat or wants to complete the task, the action is immediately performed. You can decide whether or not to execute it.

In the above embodiment, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, a jackpot notification image is displayed if there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the variable effect being executed and pending, and further, a predetermined condition is satisfied. The case of displaying the variable time notification image was described. Instead of this, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, each variation of the pending variation effect is performed regardless of whether or not there is a variation effect that becomes a big hit in the variable effect being executed or pending. It may display the time. In this case, the player cannot know whether or not there is a big hit variation effect in the running and pending variation effects, but can know each variation time of the pending variation effect. Some variable productions take several minutes for special reach. By knowing each variable time of the pending variable effect, the player can make a determination to leave the seat or finish the task while the variable effect having such a long variable time is being executed. In this case, the remaining variable time of the running variable effect may be displayed together with each variable time of the pending variable effect. As a result, when the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect being executed is long, the player can make a determination to leave the seat or finish the business during that time.

If the variable time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly speaking, when the jackpot lottery is performed), the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped. Even if it is not, after that, assuming that there is no prize in the first ball opening 64 (there is no hold of a new variable effect), each variable time of the pending variable effect is calculated and the variable time is announced. An image may be displayed. As a result, even if the launch of the ball into the game area is not stopped, the time until the player becomes a big hit is predicted to some extent, and it is judged whether or not there is time to leave the seat or finish the work. Can be done. In this case, while the launch of the ball is not stopped, a character such as "(expected)" is written on the right side of each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect displayed on the fluctuation time notification image, or it is pending. The brightness of the characters at each fluctuation time of the fluctuation time may be dimmed so that the player can understand that each is a value based on the assumption. Then, when it is determined that the launch of the ball has been stopped, the character "(expected)" is deleted or the brightness of the character is displayed brightly, and the pending time is displayed on the variable time notification image. The player may be shown that each variation time of the variation effect is an accurate value.

Further, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a case where the fluctuation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the fluctuation effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the big hit lottery is performed). If it is determined that the ball has been launched into the game area, it is stored in each of the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b as the fluctuation time of each pending variation effect. The shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 may be calculated and the fluctuation time notification image may be displayed. In this case, while the launch of the ball is not stopped, a character such as "or more" may be written on the right side of each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect displayed on the fluctuation time notification image. As a result, even if the launch of the ball into the game area is not stopped, the shortest fluctuation time in each pending fluctuation production can be grasped, so it is necessary to judge whether or not there is time to leave the seat or finish the work. Can be done.

Further, when the variable time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the big hit lottery is performed), the number of reserved balls at that time is particularly high. When it is determined that the launch of the ball to the game area is stopped when the notification button 23 is pressed in a case where the fluctuation time tends to be determined to be short when the fluctuation time is large, the fluctuation time notification is performed. In the image, not only the fluctuation time (current fluctuation time) of each fluctuation effect when the state in which the launch of the ball is stopped is maintained, but also the look-ahead information first of the look-ahead information storage area 223b for each variation effect. The shortest fluctuation time (shortest fluctuation time) among the fluctuation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls is calculated based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each of the fourth areas, and the current fluctuation time is calculated. The shortest fluctuation time may be displayed together with. In this case, for the shortest fluctuation time, a character such as "or more" may be written on the right side thereof. As a result, the player can launch the ball in the variable effect executed up to the variable effect having the shortest variable time enough to leave the seat or complete the task, based on the current variable time and the shortest variable time. Since it is possible to grasp how much the fluctuation time will be shortened, for example, by launching a ball, a fluctuation effect having the shortest fluctuation time that allows the player to leave the seat or complete the matter can be executed quickly, and the exit or the matter can be completed. It is possible to let the player make a decision to finish it quickly.

In the above embodiment, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the variable effect being executed and pending, and the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped. The case where the variable time notification image is displayed is described under the condition of. Instead of this, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, if there is a variable effect that is being executed or is on hold, or if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the pending variable effect, it is combined with the big hit notification image. Alternatively, instead of the jackpot notification image, the fluctuation time notification image may be displayed regardless of the stop of the launch of the ball. As a result, the player can grasp that there is a variable effect that is being executed or is pending, or that the pending variable effect is a big hit, and that the variable time of each variable effect can be known. By knowing the existence of the jackpot and the fluctuation time of each fluctuation production, the player can make a decision to leave the seat or finish the business.

If the variable time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly speaking, when the jackpot lottery is performed), the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped. Even if it is not, after that, assuming that there is no prize in the first ball opening 64 (there is no hold of a new variable effect), each variable time of the pending variable effect is calculated and the variable time is announced. An image may be displayed. As a result, even if the launch of the ball into the game area is not stopped, the time until the player becomes a big hit is predicted to some extent, and it is judged whether or not there is time to leave the seat or finish the work. Can be done. In this case, while the launch of the ball is not stopped, a character such as "(expected)" is written on the right side of each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect displayed on the fluctuation time notification image, or it is pending. The brightness of the characters at each fluctuation time of the fluctuation time may be dimmed so that the player can understand that each is a value based on the assumption. Then, when it is determined that the launch of the ball has been stopped, the character "(expected)" is deleted or the brightness of the character is displayed brightly, and the pending time is displayed on the variable time notification image. The player may be shown that each variation time of the variation effect is an accurate value.

Further, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a case where the fluctuation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the fluctuation effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the big hit lottery is performed). If it is determined that the ball has been launched into the game area, it is stored in each of the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b as the fluctuation time of each pending variation effect. The shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 may be calculated and the fluctuation time notification image may be displayed. In this case, while the launch of the ball is not stopped, a character such as "or more" may be written on the right side of each fluctuation time of the pending fluctuation effect displayed on the fluctuation time notification image. As a result, even if the launch of the ball into the game area is not stopped, the shortest fluctuation time in each pending fluctuation production can be grasped, so it is necessary to judge whether or not there is time to leave the seat or finish the work. Can be done.

Further, when the variable time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the big hit lottery is performed), the number of reserved balls at that time is particularly high. When it is determined that the launch of the ball to the game area is stopped when the notification button 23 is pressed in a case where the fluctuation time tends to be determined to be short when the fluctuation time is large, the fluctuation time notification is performed. In the image, not only the fluctuation time (current fluctuation time) of each fluctuation effect when the state in which the launch of the ball is stopped is maintained, but also the look-ahead information first of the look-ahead information storage area 223b for each variation effect. The shortest fluctuation time (shortest fluctuation time) among the fluctuation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls is calculated based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each of the fourth areas, and the current fluctuation time is calculated. The shortest fluctuation time may be displayed together with. In this case, for the shortest fluctuation time, a character such as "or more" may be written on the right side thereof. As a result, the player can launch the ball in the variable effect executed up to the variable effect having the shortest variable time enough to leave the seat or complete the task, based on the current variable time and the shortest variable time. Since it is possible to grasp how much the fluctuation time will be shortened, for example, by launching a ball, a fluctuation effect having the shortest fluctuation time that allows the player to leave the seat or complete the matter can be executed quickly, and the exit or the matter can be completed. It is possible to let the player make a decision to finish it quickly.

In the above embodiment, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, a jackpot notification image is displayed if there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the variable effect being executed or held, and further, a predetermined condition is satisfied. The case of displaying the variable time notification image was described. Instead of this, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, if there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the variable effect being executed or pending, the time until the big hit is displayed. May be good. Since the player can grasp the time until the big hit by performing a predetermined pressing operation on the notification button 23, the player decides to stop the game and finish the seat or the business before the big hit. Has the effect of making it easier for the player. In this case, if there is no variable effect that is a big hit in the pending variable effect, the notification may be non-executed. As a result, when the player presses the notification button 23 in a predetermined manner, if the notification is not performed, it can be understood that at least the pending fluctuation effect will not be a big hit. You can make a decision to finish. Further, if there is no variable effect that is a big hit in the variable effect being executed and pending, the notification may be non-executed. As a result, when the player presses the notification button 23 in a predetermined manner, if the notification is not performed, it can be understood that not only the pending variation effect but also the running variation effect will not be a big hit. , It is possible to make a decision to immediately leave the seat or finish the work without waiting for the variable effect being executed to end.

If the variable time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly speaking, when the jackpot lottery is performed), the launch of the balls into the game area is stopped. Even if it is not, the time until a big hit may be calculated and displayed on the assumption that there is no winning in the first ball opening 64 (there is no reservation of a new variable effect). As a result, even if the launch of the ball into the game area is not stopped, the time until the player becomes a big hit is predicted to some extent, and it is judged whether or not there is time to leave the seat or finish the work. Can be done. In this case, while the launch of the ball is not stopped, a character such as "(expected)" is written on the right side of the time until the jackpot is displayed on the fluctuation time notification image, or until the jackpot is reached. The brightness of the letters of time may be dimmed to show the player that each is a hypothetical value. Then, when it is determined that the launch of the ball has been stopped, the characters "(expected)" are deleted or the brightness of the characters is displayed brightly, and the time until the jackpot is reached is an accurate value. It may be shown to the player that there is.

Further, when the notification button 23 is pressed in a case where the fluctuation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the fluctuation effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the big hit lottery is performed). If it is determined that the ball has been launched into the game area, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b are used for each of the reserved fluctuation effects. After calculating the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls, the shortest time until a big hit may be calculated and displayed. In this case, while the launch of the ball is not stopped, a character such as "or more" may be written on the right side of the time until the big hit. As a result, even if the launch of the ball into the game area is not stopped, at least the time it takes for the player to become a big hit can be grasped, so it is determined whether or not there is time to leave the seat or finish the work. be able to.

Further, when the variable time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the big hit lottery is performed), the number of reserved balls at that time is particularly high. When it is determined that the launch of the ball to the game area is stopped when the notification button 23 is pressed in a case where the fluctuation time tends to be determined to be short if the number is large, the launch of the ball is started. Not only the time until the jackpot is reached (the time until the current jackpot is reached) when the stopped state is maintained, but also the look-ahead information storage area 223b is stored for each reserved variable effect. After calculating the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls based on the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1, and then adding the time until the current jackpot is reached, until the jackpot is reached. The shortest time of may be displayed. In this case, for the shortest time until a big hit, a character such as "or more" may be written on the right side of the shortest time. As a result, when the player feels that the time to hit the jackpot is long based on the current time to hit the jackpot, the time to hit the jackpot can be shortened by launching the ball. It is possible to grasp whether or not it will be done based on the shortest time until it becomes a big hit. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make the player decide to leave the seat or finish the work after the ball is launched and the big hit is established quickly.

In the above embodiment, when the player leaves the seat or completes the message based on the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, what kind of effect is produced while the player is leaving or completing the message. The player cannot know if it was done. However, some players are paying attention to what kind of production was performed by the pachinko machine 10. For example, when a player starts a game, a password issued by a maker or the like is input to the game machine, and when the game is ended, the game machine displays a two-dimensional code including information such as a game history. There is a gaming machine having a function of having a player's mobile terminal or the like read the game history and registering the game history in a server of a maker or the like. In such a game machine, the game history includes the history of the effect executed by the game machine, and based on the history of the effect, special content can be downloaded to the player's mobile terminal, or in the next game. There are some that give a privilege to the player by causing the game machine to perform a special effect, and the player pays attention to what kind of effect is performed on the game machine. Therefore, after the notification button 23 is pressed, the history of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 during the predetermined period may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can know the production performed by the pachinko machine 10 while leaving the seat or completing the business. Therefore, the player can leave the seat or finish the work with peace of mind. The effect history may display what kind of effect is performed for each variable effect executed after the notification button 23 is pressed. As a result, the player can know the performed production in detail. Further, when a predetermined effect is executed, it may be displayed that the effect has been executed. As a result, it is possible to easily know whether or not the effect that the player is paying attention to is executed. Regarding the start of the display of the history of the effect, after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the operation button 22 or the notification button 23 is pressed at the timing when the player tries to leave the seat or start the business. You may start displaying the history of the production. As a result, the history of the effect executed after the player has at least taken his or her eyes off the pachinko machine 10 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the notification button 23 is pressed, the display of the history of the effect may be unconditionally started. As a result, even if the player does not leave the seat as a result, the display of the history of the effect is started, but the display of the history of the effect can be started with simple control. On the other hand, regarding the end of the display of the history of the effect, the player may press the operation button 22 or the notification button 23 in order to end the display of the history of the effect. As a result, the history of the effect can be continuously displayed based on the player's intention, and the display can be erased. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the notification button 23 was pressed, the display of the history of the effect may be terminated. As a result, the display of the history of the effect can be terminated with simple control.

In the above embodiment, when it is determined whether or not the launch of the ball into the game area has been stopped as one of the conditions for displaying the variable time notification image, when the ball launched into the game area is discharged to the outside. It is determined whether or not there is a state in which there is no entry into the general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66, which are the openings passing through the opening, for 5 seconds or more, and these openings are entered. Although the case of determining whether or not the launch of the ball into the game area has been stopped if the ball has not entered for 5 seconds or more has been described, the method of determining whether or not the launch of the ball into the game area has been stopped has been described. Is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the output of the touch sensor 51a provided on the firing handle 51 is input to the voice lamp control device 113 and the player releases the hand from the firing handle 51, the output of the touch sensor 51a changes from on to off. It is determined that the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and the player operates the firing handle 51, so that the output of the touch sensor 51a is turned on from off. It may be determined that the ball has been launched into the game area by the change to. Further, a sensor for detecting a ball guided to the upper part of the game area from the ball guide passage (see FIG. 2) formed by the two rails 61 and 62 is provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the sensor is used for a predetermined time. If the ball is not detected, it may be determined that the launch of the ball into the game area has been stopped, and if the sensor detects the ball, it may be determined that the ball has been launched into the game area. The sensor may, for example, detect the opening / closing of the return ball prevention member 68 attached to the tip of the inner rail 61, and the return ball prevention member 68 opens from the ball guide passage to the upper part of the game area. May be configured to detect the ball guided to the upper part of the game area by detecting the open state of the return ball prevention member 68 when the ball is guided.

In the above embodiment, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, the operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, and the variable effect is suspended after the invalid setting is made. The case where the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 is canceled when the execution of all the variable effects (including) is completed and the pending variable effect becomes 0 has been described. Instead of this, the timing for canceling the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 is a pending variable effect in which the look-ahead is performed in the look-ahead process executed when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed. When the execution of the variable effect held when the look-ahead process is executed is completed, the notification button 23 even if there is a pending variable effect (even if there is a variable effect held after the look-ahead process). You may cancel the invalidation of the operation of. As a result, at least in the pending variation effect in which the presence or absence of the variation effect, which is a big hit when making a notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, is determined by the look-ahead process, the notification button 23 is completed until the execution is completed. Since the pressing operation of is invalidated, it is possible to prevent a person other than the player from grasping whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the pending variable effect. On the other hand, when the execution of the pending variation effect, in which the presence or absence of the variation effect that becomes a big hit when performing the announcement based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is determined by the look-ahead process is completed, the player presses the notification button 23 again. By pressing the button, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the variable effect held after the look-ahead process, so that the player can make a big hit in the running or pending variable effect. You can have many opportunities to grasp whether or not there is a variable effect.

Further, the timing for canceling the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 may be the case where the winning of the first ball opening 64 is detected. As a result, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated from the time when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is performed until the next detection of the winning of the ball to the first entry port 64. Therefore, if the player stops launching the ball, presses the notification button 23 in a predetermined manner, and obtains a notification based on the pressing operation, until the player resumes the game (ball launching). (Until resuming), it is possible to prevent a person other than the player from knowing whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the pending variable effect. On the other hand, when the player resumes the game and the winning of the ball to the first ball entry port 64 is detected, the player presses the notification button 23 again to move to the first ball entry port 64. It is possible to newly determine whether or not there is a variable effect that will be a big hit in the pending variable effect, including the winning of the prize. Further, after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is performed, the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 can be canceled only by monitoring the presence or absence of the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, so that the control is easy. Can be done.

Further, in addition to the above-described embodiment and the above-mentioned modification, the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 is canceled at the timing when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the timing when the jackpot effect is completed. May be good. When the player confirms the existence of the variable effect that becomes a big hit by the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the player may continue the game until the big hit without leaving the seat or doing the business. Then, at the stage when the jackpot effect is completed, the pending variable effect may be left. By canceling the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 at the timing when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the timing when the jackpot effect is completed, the player can press the notification button 23. Can confirm whether or not there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the pending variable effect at the stage when the big hit is completed. Therefore, the player can immediately determine whether or not the player may immediately perform the act of leaving the seat or completing the business at that stage again after the big hit.

In the above embodiment, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, if the operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, even if the predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23 until the invalidation is canceled. The case where the notification is not executed has been described, but if a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23 during the period when the operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, an image different from the jackpot notification image or the like is displayed. You may. For example, the color of the boy's hair HB may be displayed in red, or the boy's hair HB may remain black, regardless of whether or not there is a big hit variation effect in the running and pending fluctuation effects. The color may be displayed in gold to display an image different from the jackpot notification image (an image in which the boy's hair HB is gold). As a result, after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, a strange image different from the jackpot notification image or the like is displayed during the period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated. Therefore, when the player leaves the gaming machine according to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, even if a person other than the player presses the notification button 23, only a strange image is displayed. It can confuse and irritate anyone other than the person. Therefore, it is possible to suppress another player from obtaining the profit of the jackpot obtained by the variable staging held by the game of the person who originally played the game, and it is possible to protect the profit of the person who originally played the game. ..

In the above embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed, a case is described in which it is notified whether or not there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit among the variable effects being executed and pending. On the other hand, at present, when the player starts the game, the password issued by the manufacturer or the like is input to the game machine, and when the game is ended, the game machine side includes information such as the game history2. There is a gaming machine having a function of displaying a dimensional code, having the player's mobile terminal or the like read it, and registering the game history in a server of a maker or the like. In such a gaming machine, the notification button 23 is pressed only from the time when the password is input at the start of the game until the two-dimensional code including the information such as the game history at the end of the game is displayed. The operation may be regarded as valid, and it may be notified whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit among the variable effects being executed and pending. In this case, the display of the two-dimensional code including the information such as the game history accompanying the end of the big hit may be possible even while the variable effect is being performed. As a result, the player who started the game by inputting the password presses the notification button 23, and after the notification based on the pressing operation is executed, the two-dimensional code accompanying the end of the game is displayed on the gaming machine. For example, whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit for the variable effect being executed or pending by another person pressing the notification button 23 even if the player leaves the seat during the execution of the variable effect. It is possible to make it impossible to grasp.

In addition, the game machine is configured so that the password entered by the player is input when the game is started, and the password input at the start is input when the game is ended, and the password is input when the game is started. The operation of pressing the notification button 23 is considered to be valid only from the time when the game is played until the password is input at the end of the game, and there is a big hit variation effect in the running and pending variation effects. You may want to announce whether or not. In this case, the password may be input at the end of the jackpot even while the variable effect is being performed. As a result, the person who started the game by inputting the password presses the notification button 23, the notification based on the pressing operation is executed, and then the password accompanying the end of the game is input, and then the variable effect is produced. Even if the player leaves the table during the execution of, another person cannot press the notification button 23 to grasp whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit for the variation effect being executed or pending. can do.

In the above embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed during the period when the notification button 23 is disabled, any of the third symbol display device 81, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like. In the meantime, some kind of notification may be given. As a result, if another person presses the notification button 23 while the person who was originally playing the game is leaving due to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the person who was originally playing the game is seated. When returning to, it can be known that another person has pressed the notification button 23. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another person from pressing the notification button 23. Further, when the notification button 23 is pressed more than a predetermined number of times during the period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalid, an alarm sound may be sounded. As a result, during the period when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, the fact that the notification button 23 has been pressed more than a predetermined number of times is notified to the person who was originally playing the game or the person concerned in the hall while he / she is away. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another person from pressing the notification button 23.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed, the hall computer provided outside the pachinko machine 10 may be notified of the operation. As a result, the hall computer can grasp the pressing operation status of the notification button 23, so that the person concerned with the hall can grasp when there is a strange pressing operation of the notification button 23.

In the above embodiment, the case where the jackpot notification image is displayed when there is a variable effect that becomes a jackpot among the variable effects being executed and pending has been described, but when the jackpot notification image is displayed, the jackpot type is It may be displayed so that it can be understood. For example, in the 2R probability variation jackpot, the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is often performed in a very short time, the jackpot period ends immediately, and it is extremely rare for the ball to win the specific winning opening 65a. If it is a 2R probability change jackpot, some players are thinking of leaving their seats or completing their duties. Also, if the jackpot notification image is displayed, the jackpot type cannot be grasped, so wait until the jackpot is reached without leaving the seat or making a request. Some players feel that. On the other hand, when displaying the jackpot notification image, if the jackpot type is displayed so that the jackpot type can be understood, the jackpot type at the time of the jackpot can be grasped. You can decide whether to leave your seat or finish your work.

In the above embodiment, a case where a jackpot notification image, a fluctuation time notification image, or the like is displayed when there is a fluctuation effect that becomes a jackpot among the fluctuation effects being executed and pending has been described. However, the jackpot notification image and the fluctuation time notification have been described. The case of displaying an image or the like may be limited to the case where there is a jackpot of a predetermined jackpot type in the variable effect being executed and pending, or in the variable effect being held. For example, when there is a variable effect that is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot in the variable effect being executed and pending, or in the pending variable effect, the jackpot notification image or the variable time notification image. Etc. may be displayed, and the jackpot notification image, the fluctuation time notification image, and the like may be hidden even if there is a fluctuation effect that is a 2R probability variation jackpot. As a result, the player presses the notification button 23 and displays the notification image when the player wants to stop the game and leave the seat, or when he / she wants to complete a message such as a call or e-mail by a mobile phone. Whether or not there is a variable effect that is at least a predetermined jackpot type jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot or 15R normal jackpot in the above example) in the running variable effect and the pending variable effect. Can be confirmed. Therefore, if there is no variable effect that becomes a jackpot of the predetermined jackpot type, the player can make a decision to immediately stop the game in order to perform an act such as leaving the seat or completing the business. Further, if there is a variable effect that becomes a jackpot of a predetermined jackpot type, the player can make a determination to continue the game until the jackpot is reached. That is, the notification button 23 can be used to determine whether or not the player may immediately execute the action when he / she wants to leave the seat or complete the business. In particular, in the 2R probability variation jackpot, as described above, the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is often performed in a very short time, the jackpot period ends immediately, and it is extremely rare for the ball to win the specific winning opening 65a. Since it is rare, there are many players who want to leave their seats or finish their work when the 2R probability change jackpot is achieved. Even if there is a 2R probability change jackpot in the running and pending fluctuation effects, or in the pending fluctuation effects, if the jackpot notification image, fluctuation time notification image, etc. are hidden, the 2R probability variation jackpot will be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having to wait without leaving the seat or performing a business.

In addition, when the jackpot notification image, the fluctuation time notification image, etc. are hidden even if there is a 2R probability variation jackpot in the running and pending fluctuation effects, or in the pending fluctuation effects, the game There is a possibility that the 2R probability variation jackpot will occur while the person is away, and the screen (background image, etc.) corresponding to the high probability state (probability variation state) will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the player may be in an unexpectedly probable state while he / she is away, so that, for example, another person can play the game without permission while he / she is away. You will be suspicious that you have gone. On the other hand, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, there is no 15R probability variable jackpot or 15R normal jackpot in the running and pending variable effects, or in the pending variable effects. If there is a 2R probability change jackpot, the probability change transition notification image for notifying the transition to the high probability state may be displayed for a predetermined time. As the probability change transition notification image, the staging image itself displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when developing into a high probability state may be used. As a result, the player can grasp that there is a 2R probability variation jackpot in the variable effect being executed and pending, or in the variable effect being held, and the transition to the high probability state occurs. Even if the screen corresponding to the high probability state is displayed when returning after leaving the seat, it can be grasped that it is caused by the fluctuation effect being executed or pending before leaving the seat. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having the above suspicions.

In addition, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, if there is a 2R probability variation jackpot in the running and pending fluctuation effects, or in the pending fluctuation effects, Even if the 2R probability variation jackpot is established, the screen corresponding to the high probability state is not displayed, and a sufficient predetermined time has elapsed as the time required from the player leaving the seat to returning after the 2R probability variation jackpot. After that, the screen corresponding to the high probability state may be displayed. If the screen corresponding to the high probability state is displayed after the player who left the seat based on the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 returns to the seat, the execution is performed when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is performed. It is possible to let the player know that there was a 2R probability change jackpot in the variable effect during and on hold, or in the variable effect on hold, and another person can play while he / she is away. It is possible to suppress the suspicion that the person may have gone without permission. In addition, even if a player becomes a 2R probability variable jackpot and becomes a high-probability state while the player is away, the screen corresponding to the high-probability state is not displayed until the player returns, so that the other person has a high-probability state. It is possible to hide the fact that it is.

In addition, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, if there is a 2R probability variation jackpot in the running and pending fluctuation effects, or in the pending fluctuation effects, Even if the 2R probability variation jackpot is established, the screen corresponding to the high probability state is not displayed, and then, when the notification button 23 is pressed by a predetermined button or the frame button 22 is pressed by a predetermined button, the probability is high. The screen according to the state may be displayed. As a result, while the player is leaving the seat based on the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the variable effect being executed and pending when the notification is executed, or the variable effect being held is pending. If the 2R probability change jackpot in the box is established, the player who has returned to the seat performs a predetermined pressing operation on the notification button 23 again, or the player performs an assumed pressing operation on the frame button 22. By performing the above, it is possible to display an image according to the high probability state. That is, unless the player returns to the seat and presses the notification button 23 again, or the player does not perform the assumed pressing operation on the frame button 22, the image corresponding to the high probability state is displayed. Where it is not displayed, if an image corresponding to the effect shoe state is displayed when the player returns to the seat, it means that another person has pressed the notification button 23 or the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to know that another person has operated the pachinko machine 10 while the player is away, in other words, it is possible to prevent another person from operating the pachinko machine 10 without permission.

In the above embodiment, after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is performed, the variation effect is executed as usual, but instead, when the notification button 23 has a predetermined pressing operation, it is held. If it is judged that there is no jackpot variation effect in the inside variation effect (that is, all pending variation effects are out of order) and the jackpot notification image etc. is not displayed, at least for the notification. As for the variable effect that is the target of pre-reading, it is possible not to perform an effect that improves the expectation that is a big hit. If the jackpot notification image or the like is not displayed even though the notification button 23 is pressed, it means that there is no jackpot variation effect in the running and pending variation effects at the time of pressing the button 23. The player can know. Therefore, even though it is known that the player will not be a big hit, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming white by performing an effect that improves the expectation that the player will be a big hit. Further, by not performing the effect of improving the expectation of a big hit, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory or the like meaninglessly, so that it is possible to suppress the shortening of the life of the gaming machine. In addition, as a result of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, when the jackpot notification image or the like is not displayed, only in the situation where the launch of the ball to the game area is stopped, at least pre-reading for the notification. Regarding the variable effect that is the target of the above, it is possible not to perform an effect that improves the expectation that becomes a big hit. As a result, when the ball is launched into the game area, even if the jackpot notification image or the like is not displayed due to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the effect of improving the expectation of a jackpot is improved. Since it is performed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that will be a big hit in the variable effect performed based on the fact that the ball wins the first ball opening 64 after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23. , It is possible to enhance the interest in games. When the fluctuation effect is executed so as not to perform the effect of improving the expectation of a big hit, the symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the high-speed fluctuation is executed by simply knowing the fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to execute a variable effect with simple control so as not to perform an effect that improves the expectation of a big hit. Further, when the variable effect is executed so as not to improve the expectation that is a hit, the animation, the drama, the music video, or the like may be played within the predetermined variable time. By watching these animations and the like, the player can alleviate the dissatisfaction with the long-time fluctuation production even though he / she knows that it will be out of order.

In the above embodiment, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, a so-called one-shot notification effect (an effect of notifying that the expectation of a big hit is 100%) is performed at that time. If so, the jackpot notification image or the like may be hidden even if there is a variable effect that is a big hit among the variable effects being executed and pending. Since it is possible to let the player know that the jackpot will be a big hit by the one-shot notification effect, it is not necessary to display the jackpot notification image, etc., and by hiding the jackpot notification image, etc., the one-shot notification effect is produced. Players can be concentrated in.

In the above embodiment, the case where the pre-reading process is performed by the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, but every time there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64, the first control device 110 acquires the pre-reading process. When the value of the random number counter C1 or the like per unit is pre-read to determine whether or not it is a big hit, the determination result is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the notification button 23 is pressed, the main operation is performed. Based on the determination result of the look-ahead process received from the control device 110, it may be determined whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the variable effect during execution or pending. Further, when the main control device 110 performs a big hit lottery for the variation effect to be executed, the value of the pending first random number counter C1 or the like is pre-read, and the variation effect to be executed and the pending variation are to be executed. It is determined whether or not there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit in the effect, and the determination result is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In the voice lamp control device 113, when the notification button 23 is pressed, Based on the determination result transmitted from the main control device 110, control may be performed to notify whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the variable effect being executed or pending.

Further, the look-ahead process may be executed by the display control device 114. For example, information for performing look-ahead processing, that is, a random number counter C1 per first, a type counter C2 per first, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type acquired from a counter buffer in the main control device 110 in connection with a start winning prize. A look-ahead information storage area similar to that shown in FIG. 8 for storing each value of the counter CS1 is provided in the display control device 114, and is stored in the look-ahead information storage area when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the display control device 114 executes the look-ahead process, and it is determined that there is a big hit variation effect in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect. In that case, the jackpot notification image may be displayed. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the hold ball number command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 as a display hold ball number command as it is. As a result, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the main control device 110 in connection with the start winning are used in the look-ahead information first to fourth areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area of the display control device 114. Of these, it can be stored in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the display reserved ball number command. Then, each time the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 may execute the same shift processing as the processing of S1103 of FIG. 24 on the look-ahead information storage area. As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main control device 110 are stored in the read-ahead information 0th area provided in the look-ahead information storage area of the display control device 114. The read-ahead information 1st to 4th areas have the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding 1st to 4th areas of the holding ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110, respectively. Can be stored.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to give a display instruction to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a look-ahead information storage area similar to that shown in FIG. 8 is provided in the RAM of the one control device, and the main control device 110 is provided. When a hold ball count command is received, the hold ball count command is assigned to the area corresponding to the look-ahead hold count of the hold ball count command among the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area. Each included counter value C1 to C3, CS1 may be stored. Further, one control device may execute the same shift processing as the processing of S1103 of FIG. 24 between the 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information each time the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. Then, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, one control device may execute the look-ahead process based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead information storage area. ..

In the above embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed, a case is described in which it is notified whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the variable effect being executed and pending. May not notify, but may notify whether or not there is a variable effect that is a big hit in the pending variable effect. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the player may immediately perform an act of leaving the seat or completing the business after the execution of the variation effect is completed. Further, when the notification button 23 is pressed, the look-ahead process is executed only for the variable effect for which the number of hold times is within a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the variable effect being executed and the number of hold times are the predetermined number of times. Notifies whether or not there is a variable effect that will be a big hit in the variable effect within (for example, 2 times) or in the variable effect within the predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) except for the variable effect being executed. You may. As a result, if the player can leave the seat in a short time, or if the business can be completed immediately, and if there is no variable effect that the number of holds is at least within a predetermined number of times, the exit or requirement is completed. The player can be made to make a decision to try. In addition, when the notification button 23 is pressed, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit within a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes) by the look-ahead process, and the determination result is notified so that it can be understood. May be good. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not there is a possibility of a big hit within 2 minutes, and based on this, can decide whether or not to leave the seat or complete the business.

In the above embodiment, when the jackpot notification command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display lamp control device 114, the display control device 114 receives the jackpot notification image based on the content indicated by the jackpot notification command. The case of developing the jackpot notification image data and the jackpot reserved image data by the setting process (see S1906, FIG. 37 (b)) has been described. On the other hand, an additional data table for displaying the jackpot notification image corresponding to the jackpot notification command is prepared in the additional data table storage area 232b, and when the display control device 114 receives the jackpot notification command, the jackpot notification is announced. By reading the additional data table corresponding to the command from the additional data table 232b and setting it in the additional data table buffer 233b, it is added to the image displayed according to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, and the jackpot notification is given. It may be configured to display an image.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the fluctuation time notification command to the display lamp control device 114, the display control device 114 fluctuates based on the content indicated by the fluctuation time notification command. A case where the variable time notification image data is developed by the time notification image setting process (see S1908, FIG. 38 (b)) has been described. On the other hand, an additional data table for displaying the fluctuation time notification image is prepared in the additional data table storage area 232b, and when the display control device 114 receives the fluctuation time notification command, it corresponds to the fluctuation time notification command. By reading the additional data table to be added from the additional data table 232b and setting it in the additional data table buffer 233b, the variable time notification image is added to the image displayed according to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. It may be configured to be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the case where the variation start flag is always set to ON when the stop type command is received has been described, but the variation pattern command is received. When the stop type command is received after the above, the fluctuation start flag may be set to on. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a strange variation effect when the variation pattern command is not received and the stop type command is received.

Further, the fluctuation start flag may be set to be on at the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command based on the fact that the variation start flag is turned on. The variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 is made to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. Can be done. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing when the stop type command is received. It may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, the player determines whether or not there is a variable effect that becomes a big hit during the variable effect of the third symbol that is suspended and executed when the ball enters the first ball opening 64 (starting prize). The case of notifying the player by the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 has been described. On the other hand, it hits in the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) that is suspended and executed when the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (starting prize) (stops at the symbol "○"). Whether or not there is something that becomes a big hit during the fluctuation effect of the third symbol by the notification based on the player's pressing operation of the notification button 23, or instead. , May be notified to the player. As a result, is there a winning variation display in the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) that is pending, or in the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) that is being executed or pending? The player can grasp whether or not. Therefore, the notification button 23 can be used to determine whether or not the player may immediately execute the action when he / she wants to leave the seat or complete the task. Some gaming machines improve their playability by the presence or absence of hits of ordinary symbols, and are particularly effective in such gaming machines. In this case, based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, each fluctuation time of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is displayed or hit together with the notification of the presence or absence of a hit or instead of the notification of the presence or absence of a hit. You may display the time until it becomes. Further, the above-mentioned modification shown for the notification regarding the variation effect of the third symbol based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 can be applied to the notification regarding the variation effect of the second symbol (ordinary symbol).

In the above embodiment, the case where the drawing content for adding and displaying the continuous advance notice effect which is not normally displayed in the variable effect to the third symbol display device 81 is defined as the additional data table has been described, but it is not always the case. The additional data table is not limited, and the additional data table is various effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. The drawing contents for drawing may be defined. Further, in the additional data table, the drawing contents necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. In addition to prescribing, or in addition to prescribing such drawing content, the drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or the display in one effect. The drawing content required to change and display the image to be displayed may be the default one.

When the drawing content required to change a part or all of the color tone in one effect is specified by the additional data table, the additional data table displays an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to an address expressed in units of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment), the type of sprite that changes the color tone at that time, and the color information that specifies the color tone after the change in the sprite. It may be specified. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional drawing content specified in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233b, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a is added. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table. Such an additional data table may be prepared for displaying the jackpot notification image, and for example, the color of the boy's hair HB may be changed from the color specified by the display data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the additional data table, in the additional data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is used. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional drawing contents specified in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233b. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed. Such an additional data table is prepared for displaying the jackpot notification image, for example, the boy displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 as the jackpot notification image is replaced with another character. May be good.

In the above embodiment, in the display control device 314, in addition to the display data table that defines the drawing contents of the base effect (for example, variable effect), the drawing of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) to be additionally displayed is drawn. The case where an additional data table that defines the contents is set and the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233c are acquired from each data table has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the base effect (for example,). , Variable effect) When the display of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) to be additionally displayed is decided, it is additionally displayed to the display data table corresponding to the base effect. The drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the staging are added for each address indicating the display time, a new display data table is generated, and the drawing contents of the image are acquired based on the new display data table. You may do so. As a result, it is possible to easily display an effect that is additionally displayed with respect to the effect that is the base. In addition, for each type of base effect, display data table that defines the drawing content of only the base effect and display data that defines the image content that is added to the base effect and displayed. Since it is not necessary to have a table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of data tables. In addition, since the drawing content can be specified using only the newly created display data table, the processing required for the specification is compared with the case where the drawing content is specified from the display data table and the additional data table. The load on the table can be reduced.

If it is decided to hide the effect to be additionally displayed with respect to the base effect, the drawing content of the image is acquired by using the display data table corresponding to the base effect as it is. You may.

Further, in the display data table, the drawing content of the effect (for example, continuous advance notice effect) to be additionally displayed is additionally displayed together with the drawing content of the base effect (for example, variable effect). If you want to describe the drawing content of the staging in a format that clearly states that it is the drawing content of the staging, and then display the staging that is additionally displayed, it will be additionally displayed together with the drawing content of the base staging. If the drawing content of the effect is specified from the display data table and the additional and displayed effect is hidden, the additional and displayed effect drawing content is discarded and the base effect is used. Only the drawing contents of may be specified from the display data table. This eliminates the need for an additional data table that defines the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed, so that control for the additional data table becomes unnecessary and the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation effect can be expressed by, for example, the present invention. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern shown in the display fluctuation pattern command. After specifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data table corresponding to the specified paper for the variation effect is put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently have the data table.

In the above embodiment, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233c by using the common pointer 233c in the display data table and the additional data table has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for ending the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above embodiment, after the definite display data table corresponding to the definite display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233a, by the end of the definite display effect, the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233a. As described above, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233a again. Further, in this case, the definite display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233a each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the definite display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demo effect is to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , The third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table and the additional data table define the content (drawing content) of the image to be drawn at the time corresponding to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds has been described. However, the display content is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table and the additional data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table and the additional data table, as the sprite type to be drawn specified at a predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not specified, but the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. It may specify the address of the character ROM 234. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous advance notice effect is also executed by the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with the third symbol display device 81. Is provided with another 4th symbol display device, and even if a continuous advance notice effect is executed by displaying the 4th symbol on the 4th symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the 3rd symbol display device 81. good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an accessory that operates according to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the lighting unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37) performs a variation effect, the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. However, the sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 are lit or blinking, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation of a big hit. Further, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed, and continues the game, but displays the symbol by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33, the continuous warning effect is performed, so that the player is given an unusual effect. It can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as symbol display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning is performed. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the hit / fail determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, causes the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous warning effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control device can be assigned to each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation in a predetermined mode of the accessory, the voice from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. This makes it possible to execute a wider variety of continuous notice effects. Further, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). , Or a combination of them) to prepare a plurality of continuous notice effect modes that are selected according to the game state (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, off) after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. May be good.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the case where the image for the continuous advance notice effect different from the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol displayed when the variable effect is completed. In this case, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice command is received by the other command process (S12722 in FIG. 31) of the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on. At the same time, other stop symbol discrimination flags may be set to off. In the command judgment processing, after the stop identification command processing, the processing corresponding to the continuous warning command is executed in the other command processing, so the chance eye is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. It is set as a symbol. Therefore, the chance eye can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect, the player can have a feeling of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls added by "1" when there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64. The case where each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer due to the start winning is included as they are and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 for the number command has been described, but is included in the hold ball number command. The type of the counter may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Further, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the hold ball number command and notified. Instead, a command other than the reserved ball count command may include information indicating the values of each counter and notify the voice lamp control device 113 of these values. As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each counter to be notified is changed to the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is included in the command in any of the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas corresponding to the hold counts based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the hold ball number command are stored in the look-ahead information storage area 233b. The case has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a hold ball number command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, the value of each counter indicated by the command is used as a basis. , Whether it is a big hit or not, a big hit type in the case of a big hit, a part or all of the missed type in the case of a miss, etc., and these judgment results are replaced with the value of each counter indicated by the command, or , A part or all of the value of the counter may be stored in the look-ahead information storage area 233b. As a result, when the look-ahead process is executed based on the fact that the notification button 23 is pressed, the determination result such as whether the variable effect being executed or pending is a big hit is already stored in the look-ahead information storage area 233b. Therefore, in the look-ahead process, it is only necessary to read this determination result, and the execution of the process can be completed quickly. If the variation time of the variation effect is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variation effect is started (strictly speaking, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), the hold ball number command (or the time when the jackpot lottery is performed) is determined. When the command) indicating the value of each counter is received, the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation effect cannot be determined, so that the fluctuation time cannot be accurately determined. Therefore, in this case, it is preferable that at least the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for determining the fluctuation time is stored in the look-ahead information storage area 233b. As a result, if the launch of the ball to the game area is stopped when the look-ahead process is executed, the number of reserved balls when the variation effect is started can be determined, so that the ball is stored in the look-ahead information storage area 233b. The fluctuation time can be calculated based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 together with the determination result of whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the determination result of the missed type in the case of a miss.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one first entry slot 64, in which a big hit lottery is started when a ball is entered, is arranged in the game board 13, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the ball entry is independently detected and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each first ball entry port indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and the fluctuation pattern command is received, if the reserved ball number counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entrances are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired in association with the winning (starting winning) to each first ball opening is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. You may. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 in connection with the start winning is acquired in association with the start winning in any of the first entrances. It may include information indicating whether the information is correct. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning. You may. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area may be prepared for each first ball entry port. As a result, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, shift processing is performed for the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the first entry slot that detects the start winning prize that triggered the execution of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. It can be carried out. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending fluctuation effect for each first ball entry port can be held in the voice lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the probability of sorting a jackpot type, the probability of sorting a missed type, etc. differ depending on the first ball entrance that has won a start prize, will each variation effect be a jackpot in the look-ahead processing? Whether or not, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the missed type in the case of a miss, and the like can be correctly determined based on which first entrance winning the starting prize. Further, when the variable effect based on the start winning to the first ball entrance of 1 is performed in preference to the variable effect based on the start winning to the other first ball opening, the first entry of 1 is performed. Pre-reading processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the fluctuation effect based on the start winning to the ball mouth, and the number of holdings of the variation effect that will be the latest big hit can be correctly determined, so the latest big hit. It is possible to inform the player of the number of times the variable effect is held, by using the jackpot notification image.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, the voice lamp control device 113 inputs the value of each counter acquired based on the start winning to the first ball entry port from the main control device 110 by a command. When it is decided to start the continuous advance notice effect when it is received, the continuous advance notice effect is executed over all the variable effects (reserved balls) held at that time regardless of the first entrance where the start prize was given. You may. In addition, a plurality of first entrances are provided, and the variable effect for winning a prize at one first entrance is preferentially executed over the variable effect for winning a prize at another first entrance. In the pachinko machine, the start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the pre-reading result of the counter value acquired for the winning of the first ball entrance where the variable effect is preferentially executed. .. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance having a low priority, and the continuous advance notice effect is not started for this variable effect. .. If a continuous advance notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance with a low priority, and the variable effect is continuously suspended at the first ball entry port with a high priority. There is a risk that the continuous notice production will not end easily. On the other hand, in this modification, it is not determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance having a low priority, and the variable effect is not determined. Since the continuous advance notice effect is not started, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S1108 in FIG. 24). It is not always limited to this. For example, in the variation processing (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the number of reserved balls of the main control device 110 subtracted according to the variation pattern command set by the variation start processing (S307). A hold ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S305 in FIG. 16), and the hold ball number command is a variation pattern. The command may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of reserved balls held by the main control device 110. In this case, S1108 in FIG. 24 is omitted. Further, the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a after subtraction may be included in the fluctuation pattern command. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 112 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the number of reserved balls (N) included in the fluctuation pattern command may be extracted and set in the reserved ball number counter 223a.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is horizontal. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the staging display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed when the variation effect is executed, but instead of displaying the high-speed variation. Therefore, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be carried out on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls can be solved.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

The acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the display means for the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display execution means for executing a dynamic display is provided, and when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the player is determined. In the game machine that gives the game value of
A storage means that stores information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until at least used for determination by the determination means.
Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Judgment means to judge,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A detection means that detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and
The gaming machine A1 is provided with a notification means for notifying based on a determination result by the determination means when it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. ..

According to the gaming machine A1, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for the determination by the determination means. That is, if a predetermined start condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on that information is suspended. Here, the predetermined identification information is present in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended. Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information to be issued is determined by the determination means. Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the notification means is notified based on the judgment result by the judgment means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification means. It is possible to grasp whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily determine whether or not the game may be stopped immediately when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the business.

In the gaming machine A1
The determination means includes a dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means and a dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, not only the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended, but also the dynamic display execution means. Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, including the dynamic display of the identification information inside, is determined by the determination means, and a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. When it is detected by the detection means, the notification means is notified based on the judgment result by the judgment means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, not only the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification means but also the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. It is possible to grasp whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, including the display. Therefore, if it is determined by the notification by the notification means that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information being executed is performed. Since the predetermined identification information is not displayed even on the display, there is an effect that the player can make a decision to immediately leave the seat or finish the work.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2
Among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the determination means dynamically displays the other identification information before the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. In the dynamic display of identification information in which the number of holdings, which is the number of times the display is executed, is less than or equal to a predetermined number, it is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. A game machine A3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the dynamic display of other identification information is executed by the time the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. In the dynamic display of the identification information in which the number of holdings is a predetermined number or less, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Then, when it is detected by the detecting means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the notification means is notified based on the determination result by the determining means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means, the identification information in which the number of holdings is a predetermined number or less is dynamically displayed based on the notification by the notification means, that is, the identification information that can be immediately executed. It is possible to grasp whether or not a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of. Therefore, when the player can leave the seat in a short time or when the task can be completed immediately, the player can easily decide whether or not to stop the game and finish the leave or the task. It has the effect of being able to make a judgment.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2
In the determination means, among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, the predetermined identification information appears by the time when the first time elapses. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it determines whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, the dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears by the lapse of the first time. Whether or not there is is determined by the judgment means. Then, when it is detected by the detecting means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the notification means is notified based on the determination result by the determining means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information by the time when the first time elapses based on the notification by the notification means. It is possible to grasp whether or not it is. Therefore, if the player can leave the seat within the first hour, or if the message can be completed within the first hour, whether or not the game can be stopped and the player can leave the seat or complete the message. There is an effect that the player can easily make a judgment.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means dynamically displays the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears by the determination means. The gaming machine A5, characterized in that the first notification is performed based on the determination that there is.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, there are the following effects. That is, when it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, it is determined by the determination means that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Based on this, the first notification is performed by the notification means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means, if the first notification is made, it is immediately recognized that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, there is an effect that the decision to continue the game can be made immediately until the predetermined identification information appears.

In the gaming machine A5
The gaming machine A6, wherein the first notification performed by the notification means notifies at least which identification information the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, when the first notification is made, at least which identification information is dynamically displayed in which the predetermined identification information appears is notified by the notification means. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not he / she can leave the seat or complete the work by the time the dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears is executed. be.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means dynamically displays the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears by the determination means. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that a second notification is performed based on the determination that there is no such information.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, there are the following effects. That is, when it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, it is determined by the determination means that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Based on this, the second notification is performed by the notification means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means, if the second notification is made, it is immediately recognized that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Since it can be done, there is an effect that the decision to stop the game as it is and to leave the seat or complete the business can be made immediately. On the other hand, even if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, if the second notification is not performed on the notification means, the player is expected that the predetermined identification information may appear. It has the effect of being able to make a decision to continue the game while holding it.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7
The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the detecting means detects whether or not the operation for the operating means has been continuously performed for a second time or more as the predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are played. That is, when the player continuously operates the operating means for a second time or more, the operation is detected as a predetermined operation by the detecting means, and the notification by the notifying means is notified based on the judgment result by the judging means. Will be done. When the operating means is continuously operated for the second hour or more, it can be determined that the operation means is performed based on the player's intention, while the operating means is continuously operated for less than the second hour. In that case, it can be determined that the player has unintentionally operated the operating means. In the gaming machine A8, when the player unintentionally operates the operating means in this way, the player knows by notification whether or not the predetermined identification information appears. It can be suppressed and has the effect of suppressing the deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7
The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the detecting means detects whether or not the operation for the operating means has been performed a predetermined number of times within a third time as the predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are played. That is, when the player performs an operation on the operation means a predetermined number of times within the third hour, the operation is detected as a predetermined operation by the detection means, and the notification means is notified based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Will be. If the operating means is operated a predetermined number of times within the third hour, it can be determined that the operation means is performed based on the player's intention, while if the operating means is not operated a predetermined number of times within the third hour, the game is played. It can be determined that the person has unintentionally operated the operating means. In the gaming machine A9, when the player unintentionally operates the operating means in this way, the player knows whether or not the predetermined identification information appears by the notification. It can be suppressed and has the effect of suppressing the deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means is based on the determination result by the determination means until the operation on the operation means is completed. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it performs notification.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the operation on the operating means ends. Until this is done, the notification means is notified based on the judgment result by the judgment means. As a result, when the operation for the operating means is completed, the notification is also terminated. Therefore, when the player grasps the judgment result by the determining means based on the notification, the player ends the operation of the operating means to end the notification by the notification means. Can be made to. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the notification by the notification means more than necessary, it is possible to grasp whether or not a person other than the player has a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Has the effect of suppressing.

The acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the display means for the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display execution means for executing a dynamic display is provided, and when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the player is determined. In the game machine that gives the game value of
A storage means that stores information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until at least used for determination by the determination means.
A calculation means for calculating the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and a calculation means.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A detection means that detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a notifying means for notifying the execution time calculated by the calculating means when it is detected by the detecting means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means. B1.

According to the gaming machine B1, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for the determination by the determination means. That is, if a predetermined start condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on that information is suspended. Here, each execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended is calculated by the calculation means. To. Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, it is possible to grasp each execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification means. Therefore, if the player wants to leave the seat or finish the task, if there is a dynamic display of the identification information with a long execution time, the game is stopped and the player leaves while the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. It has the effect of making it easier for the player to make a decision to complete the task.

In the gaming machine B1
The calculation means has an execution time of dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. Calculate the remaining execution time until the display execution is completed,
The notification means has the execution time calculated by the calculation means and the remaining execution time as the execution time to be left when it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. The gaming machine B2, which is characterized by notifying the above.

According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1. That is, not only the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended, but also the dynamic display execution. It is calculated by the calculation means, including the remaining execution time until the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the means is completed, and the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. If so, the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended and the remaining execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means calculated by the calculation means are , Notified by the notifying means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, not only the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification means but also the identification information being executed is executed. The player can also grasp the remaining fluctuation time of the dynamic display of. Therefore, when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the task, if the remaining execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed is long, the game is immediately stopped and the player tries to leave the seat or finish the task. There is an effect that the player can easily make a judgment.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2
Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Equipped with a means of judgment to judge
The notification means dynamically displays the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears by the determination means when it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that it notifies the execution time calculated by the calculation means based on the determination that there is.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended. Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information to be performed is determined by the determination means. Then, there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears when the detection means detects that the predetermined operation has been performed for the operation means that can be operated by the player. Based on the determination by the determination means, the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, if the execution time is notified, it is immediately recognized that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Because it is possible, the decision to continue the game until the predetermined identification information appears, or to finish the seat or the business by the time the predetermined identification information appears based on the notified execution time. Or, if there is no notification, there is an effect that it is possible to immediately make a decision to leave the seat or complete the business immediately after the execution of the dynamic display of the pending identification information is started.

In the gaming machine B3
The determination means includes a dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means and a dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, not only the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended, but also the dynamic display execution means. Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, including the dynamic display of the identification information inside, is determined by the determination means, and a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. The execution time calculated by the calculation means based on the determination by the determination means that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears when the detection means detects the fact. It is notified by the notification means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, not only the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification means but also the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. It is possible to grasp whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, including the display. Therefore, if it is determined by the notification by the notification means that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information being executed is performed. Since the predetermined identification information is not displayed even on the display, there is an effect that the player can make a decision to immediately leave the seat or finish the work.

In the gaming machine B3 or B4
Among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the determination means dynamically displays the other identification information before the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. In the dynamic display of identification information in which the number of holdings, which is the number of times the display is executed, is less than or equal to a predetermined number, it is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. A game machine B5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B3 or B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the dynamic display of other identification information is executed by the time the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. In the dynamic display of the identification information in which the number of holdings is a predetermined number or less, it is determined by the determination means whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Then, when it is detected by the detecting means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, it is determined by the determining means that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Based on this, the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means, the identification information in which the number of holdings is a predetermined number or less is dynamically displayed based on the notification by the notification means, that is, the identification information that can be immediately executed. It is possible to grasp whether or not a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of. Therefore, when the player can leave the seat in a short time or when the task can be completed immediately, the player can easily decide whether or not to stop the game and finish the leave or the task. It has the effect of being able to make a judgment.

In the gaming machine B3 or B4
In the determination means, among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, the predetermined identification information appears by the time when the first time elapses. The gaming machine B6, characterized in that it determines whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B3 or B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, the dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears by the lapse of the first time. Whether or not there is is determined by the judgment means. Then, when it is detected by the detecting means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, it is determined by the determining means that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Based on this, the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information by the time when the first time elapses based on the notification by the notification means. It is possible to grasp whether or not it is. Therefore, if the player can leave the seat within the first hour, or if the message can be completed within the first hour, whether or not the game can be stopped and the player can leave the seat or complete the message. There is an effect that the player can easily make a judgment.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B6
The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that, in addition to the notification of the execution time, the notification means notifies at least which identification information the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the notification of the execution time is performed by the notification means, at least which identification information is dynamically displayed to display the predetermined identification information is also notified. As a result, the player can grasp in which identification information the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information when the execution time is notified, so that the predetermined identification information appears. You can easily grasp the time until. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can determine whether or not he / she can leave the seat or finish the work by the time the dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears is executed. ..

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means dynamically displays the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that it notifies the execution time calculated by the calculation means of the dynamic display of the identification information until the predetermined identification information appears.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the following effects are played. That is, when it is detected by the detecting means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, the predetermined identification information is present. The execution time calculated by the calculation means of the dynamic display of the identification information until it is issued is notified by the notification means. As a result, in the notification by the notification means, the player can easily understand the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information until the predetermined identification information appears, so that the predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that the player can easily make a decision on whether to stop the game and finish the seat or the business by the time the game is completed.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8
The predetermined starting condition is satisfied when the game medium launched into the predetermined gaming area wins a prize or passes through the operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area.
The gaming machine includes a stop state determining means for determining whether or not the launch of the gaming medium to the predetermined gaming area is stopped.
When the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the notification means stops the launching of the gaming medium into the predetermined gaming area by the stop state determining means. The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified on condition that it is determined to be in the above state.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the following effects are played. That is, the predetermined start condition is satisfied when the game medium launched into the predetermined game area wins a prize or passes through the operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. Whether or not the launch of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped is determined by the stop state determination means. Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the stop state determination means stops the launch of the game medium to the predetermined game area. The execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means on condition that it is determined that the state is in the state. When the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information is determined according to the number of dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended by the storage means when the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information is started. There is. If the launch of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped, the execution time of the dynamic display of the pending identification information can be accurately calculated even in such a case, so that the predetermined game On condition that it is determined that the launch of the game medium to the area is stopped, the player can be made to grasp the accurate execution time by notifying the execution time calculated by the calculation means. can. Therefore, if the player wants to leave the seat or finish the task, if there is a dynamic display of the identification information with a long execution time, the game is stopped and the player leaves while the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. It has the effect of allowing the player to make a decision to complete a task or a task based on an accurate execution time.

In the gaming machine B9
When the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the notification means stops the launching of the gaming medium into the predetermined gaming area by the stop state determining means. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that when it is determined that the machine is not in the above state, the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified as a reference value.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, it is determined that the stop state determination means is not in a state in which the launch of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped. Occasionally, the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means as a reference value. As a result, when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the work, even if the launch of the game medium to the predetermined game area is not stopped, the operation means can perform the predetermined operation. Since the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information is notified as a reference value in, if there is a dynamic display of the identification information with a long execution time based on the reference value, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. In the meantime, there is an effect that the player can make a decision to stop the game and leave the seat or finish the work.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B10
The gaming machine B11 is characterized in that the detecting means detects whether or not the operation for the operating means has been continuously performed for a second time or more as the predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the following effects are played. That is, when the player continuously operates the operation means for the second time or more, the operation is detected as a predetermined operation by the detection means, and the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means. Will be done. When the operating means is continuously operated for the second hour or more, it can be determined that the operation means is performed based on the player's intention, while the operating means is continuously operated for less than the second hour. In that case, it can be determined that the player has unintentionally operated the operating means. In the gaming machine B11, when the player unintentionally operates the operating means in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information by the notification. It has the effect of suppressing the deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B10
The gaming machine B12 is characterized in that the detecting means detects whether or not the operation for the operating means has been performed a predetermined number of times within a third time as the predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the following effects are played. That is, when the player performs an operation on the operation means a predetermined number of times within the third hour, the detection means detects the operation as a predetermined operation, and the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means. To. If the operating means is operated a predetermined number of times within the third hour, it can be determined that the operation means is performed based on the player's intention, while if the operating means is not operated a predetermined number of times within the third hour, the game is played. It can be determined that the person has unintentionally operated the operating means. In the gaming machine B12, when the player unintentionally operates the operating means in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information by notification. It has the effect of suppressing the deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B12
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means calculates the execution by the calculation means until the operation on the operation means is completed. A gaming machine B13 characterized in that it notifies the time.

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B12, when the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the operation on the operating means ends. Until then, the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified. As a result, when the operation for the operating means is completed, the notification is also terminated. Therefore, when the player grasps the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the notification, the notification means is terminated by ending the operation of the operating means. It is possible to end the notification by. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the notification by the notification means more than necessary, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a person other than the player from grasping the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information.

The acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the display means for the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display execution means for executing a dynamic display is provided, and when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the player is determined. In the game machine that gives the game value of
A storage means that stores information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until at least used for determination by the determination means.
A calculation means for calculating the time until the predetermined identification information appears based on the information stored in the storage means, and a calculation means.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A detection means that detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means for notifying the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears. , A gaming machine C1 characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine C1, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for the determination by the determination means. That is, if a predetermined start condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on that information is suspended. Here, based on each of the information stored in the storage means, the time until the predetermined identification information appears is calculated by the calculation means. Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears. Is notified by the notification means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, it is possible to grasp the time until the predetermined identification information appears based on the notification by the notification means. Therefore, when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the task, the player decides to stop the game and finish the leave or task before the predetermined identification information appears. It has the effect of being easy to make.

In the gaming machine C1
Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Equipped with a means of judgment to judge
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means dynamically displays the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears by the determination means. If it is determined that there is no notification, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the notification is not executed.

According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1. That is, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended. Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information to be performed is determined by the determination means. Then, there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears when the detection means detects that the predetermined operation has been performed for the operation means that can be operated by the player. When the judgment is made by the judgment means, the notification by the notification means is not executed. As a result, even if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means, if there is no notification, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended. You can see that there is no dynamic display. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to easily make the player decide that the game can be stopped and the player can leave the game or finish the task at least when the execution of the dynamic display of the pending identification information is started. effective.

In the gaming machine C2
The determination means includes a dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means and a dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, not only the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended, but also the dynamic display execution means. Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, including the dynamic display of the identification information inside, is determined by the determination means, and a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. When it is detected by the detection means and the determination means determines that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, the notification by the notification means is not executed. As a result, even if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, if there is no notification, not only the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended but also the dynamic display of the identification information being executed is performed. It can be grasped that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, in this case, there is an effect that the player can easily make a judgment that the game can be stopped immediately and the player can leave the seat or finish the work.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3
The predetermined starting condition is satisfied when the game medium launched into the predetermined gaming area wins a prize or passes through the operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area.
The gaming machine includes a stop state determining means for determining whether or not the launch of the gaming medium to the predetermined gaming area is stopped.
When the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the notification means stops the launching of the gaming medium into the predetermined gaming area by the stop state determining means. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that it notifies the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears, on condition that it is determined to be in the above state.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are played. That is, the predetermined start condition is satisfied when the game medium launched into the predetermined game area wins a prize or passes through the operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. Whether or not the launch of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped is determined by the stop state determination means. Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the stop state determination means stops the launch of the game medium to the predetermined game area. The time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears is notified by the notification means on condition that it is determined that the state is in the state. When the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information is determined according to the number of dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended by the storage means when the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information is started. There is. If the launch of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped, the execution time of the dynamic display of the pending identification information can be accurately calculated even in such a case, so that the predetermined game It is more accurate than notifying the time until the predetermined identification information appears, which is calculated by the calculation means, on condition that it is determined that the launch of the game medium to the area is stopped. The time can be grasped by the player. Therefore, when the player wants to leave the seat or complete the task, the decision to stop the game and complete the leave or task is made accurately before the predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that the player can be made to play based on.

In the gaming machine C4
When the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the notification means stops the launching of the gaming medium into the predetermined gaming area by the stop state determining means. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that when it is determined that the state is not in the state of being in the state, the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears is notified as a reference value.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are played. That is, when it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, it is determined that the stop state determination means is not in a state in which the launch of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped. Occasionally, the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears is notified by the notification means as a reference value. As a result, when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the work, even if the launch of the game medium to the predetermined game area is not stopped, the operation means is to perform the predetermined operation. Since the time until the predetermined identification information appears is notified as a reference value, the game is stopped and the player leaves or uses the game until the predetermined identification information appears based on the reference value. There is an effect that the player can make a decision to finish the matter.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5
The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the detecting means detects whether or not the operation for the operating means has been continuously performed for a second time or more as the predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are played. That is, when the player continuously operates the operating means for a second time or more, the operation is detected as a predetermined operation by the detecting means, and the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculating means appears. The time until the notification is made is notified by the notification means. When the operating means is continuously operated for the second hour or more, it can be determined that the operation means is performed based on the player's intention, while the operating means is continuously operated for less than the second hour. In that case, it can be determined that the player has unintentionally operated the operating means. In the gaming machine C6, when the player unintentionally operates the operating means in this way, the player knows the time until the predetermined identification information appears by the notification. It can be suppressed and has the effect of suppressing the deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5
The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the detecting means detects whether or not the operation for the operating means has been performed a predetermined number of times within a third time as the predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are played. That is, when the player performs an operation on the operation means a predetermined number of times within the third hour, the operation is detected as a predetermined operation by the detection means, and the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears. The time until the end is notified by the notification means. If the operating means is operated a predetermined number of times within the third hour, it can be determined that the operation means is performed based on the player's intention, while if the operating means is not operated a predetermined number of times within the third hour, the game is played. It can be determined that the person has unintentionally operated the operating means. In the gaming machine C7, when the player unintentionally operates the operating means in this way, the player knows the time until the predetermined identification information appears by the notification. It can be suppressed and has the effect of suppressing the deprivation of the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7
When it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means calculates the predetermined operation by the calculation means until the operation on the operation means is completed. The gaming machine C8, characterized in that it notifies the time until the identification information of the above is displayed.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, when the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the operation on the operating means ends. Until this is done, the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears is notified. As a result, when the operation for the operating means is completed, the notification is also terminated. Therefore, when the player grasps the time until the predetermined identification information appears based on the notification, the player can terminate the operation of the operating means. , The notification by the notification means can be terminated. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the notification by the notification means more than necessary, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a person other than the player from grasping the time until the predetermined identification information appears.

The acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the display means for the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display execution means for executing a dynamic display is provided, and when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the player is determined. In the game machine that gives the game value of
A storage means that stores information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until at least used for determination by the determination means.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A detection means that detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means that performs notification based on the information stored in the storage means, and
When it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, then even if a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, the notification by the notification means is not executed. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the gaming machine D1, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for the determination by the determination means. That is, if a predetermined start condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on that information is suspended. Here, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the notification means performs notification based on the information stored in the storage means. .. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, it is possible to grasp the information regarding the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification means. Therefore, based on the information on the dynamic display of the identification information that is suspended for execution, which is grasped based on the notification, whether or not the game can be stopped immediately when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the work. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily make a judgment. Further, when it is detected by the detecting means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the notification by the notifying means is not executed by the non-executing means even if the predetermined operation is subsequently performed on the operating means. To. As a result, even if a person other than the player operates the operating means while the player is leaving the seat based on the notification, it is possible to prevent the result of the notification from being known to the person other than the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interests of those who originally played the game can be protected.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, and C1 to C8.
When it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, then even if a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, the notification by the notification means is not executed. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, and C1 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is detected by the detecting means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the notification by the notifying means is not executed by the non-executing means even if the predetermined operation is subsequently performed on the operating means. To. As a result, even if a player other than the player operates the operating means while the player is leaving the seat based on the notification, it is possible to prevent the result of the notification from being known to the person other than the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interests of those who originally played the game can be protected.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2
A storage determination means for determining whether or not all the information stored in the storage means has been used for the determination by the determination means, and a storage determination means.
When it is determined by the storage determination means that all the information stored in the storage means has been used for the determination by the determination means, the storage determination means includes a canceling means for canceling the non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means. The gaming machine D3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is determined by the storage determination means that all the information stored in the storage means has been used for the determination by the determination means, the non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means is canceled by the release means. This has the effect that it is possible to prevent a person other than the player from grasping the result of the notification, at least until all the information stored in the storage means is used for the determination by the determination means. Further, when all the information stored in the storage means is used for the judgment by the determination means, it is said that the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution was suspended by the game of the person who originally played the game was once executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the person who has played the game after that can obtain the notification based on the operation by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2
A storage determination means for determining whether or not all the information stored in the storage means used for notification by the notification means was used for the determination by the determination means, and a storage determination means.
When it is determined by the storage determination means that all the information stored in the storage means used for the notification by the notification means has been used for the determination by the determination means, the notification by the non-execution means is performed. The gaming machine D4, which comprises a canceling means for canceling the non-execution of the above.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is determined by the storage determination means that all the information stored in the storage means used for the notification by the notification means has been used for the determination by the determination means, the non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means is canceled. It is released by means. As a result, at least until all the information stored in the storage means used for the notification by the notification means is used for the determination by the determination means, the notification result cannot be grasped by a person other than the player. It has the effect of being able to. Further, when all the information stored in the storage means used for the notification by the notification means is used for the determination by the determination means, the player again performs a predetermined operation on the operation means to notify the previous notification. Since the information acquired after the information used for the purpose and stored in the storage means can be used for notification by the notification means, there is an effect that the player can have many opportunities for notification. ..

In the gaming machine D1 or D2
The gaming machine D5 is provided with a canceling means for canceling the non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are played. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means is canceled by the release means. This has the effect that it is possible to prevent a person other than the player from grasping the result of the notification from the time when the notification is not executed until at least a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Further, if the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the player can perform a predetermined operation on the operating means again, and after the determination by the determination means, the player can make a judgment by the judgment means using the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have many opportunities for notification based on the information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D5
A second release means for canceling the non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine D6 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the following effects are played. That is, the non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means is canceled by the second release means when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. .. The player may continue the game without leaving the seat or performing a business by notifying the operating means based on performing a predetermined operation. Then, at the stage when the predetermined game value is given, the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended may be left. By performing a predetermined operation on the operating means again, the player can make the operating means notify the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended at the stage when the predetermined game value is given. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not the player may immediately perform the act of leaving the seat or completing the business at that stage again after the predetermined game value is given.

The acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the display means for the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display execution means for executing a dynamic display is provided, and when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the player is determined. In the game machine that gives the game value of
A storage means that stores information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until at least used for determination by the determination means.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A detection means that detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means that performs notification based on the information stored in the storage means, and
A reception means that accepts the input of the second information given to the player,
It is provided with an output means for outputting a third information regarding a game state after the input is received by the reception means based on an instruction from the player.
When the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means from the reception of the input by the receiving means to the output by the output means. The gaming machine D7, which is characterized in that it notifies the player.

According to the gaming machine D7, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for the determination by the determination means. That is, if a predetermined start condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on that information is suspended. Here, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the notification means performs notification based on the information stored in the storage means. .. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, it is possible to grasp the information regarding the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification means. Therefore, based on the information on the dynamic display of the identification information that is suspended for execution, which is grasped based on the notification, whether or not the game can be stopped immediately when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the work. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily make a judgment. Further, the input of the second information given to the player is received by the receiving means, and the third information regarding the game state after the input is received by the receiving means based on the instruction from the player is output by the output means. To. Then, from the time when the input is received by the receiving means until the output is performed by the output means, when it is detected by the detecting means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the notification means is notified. .. As a result, the person who has input the second information given to the player can obtain the notification by the notification means by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means, and output the third information regarding the game state from the output means. For example, even if the person leaves the seat, there is an effect that another person can perform a predetermined operation on the operating means so that the result of the notification cannot be grasped.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, and C1 to C8.
A reception means that accepts the input of the second information given to the player,
It is provided with an output means for outputting a third information regarding a game state after the input is received by the reception means based on an instruction from the player.
When the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means from the reception of the input by the receiving means to the output by the output means. The gaming machine D8, which is characterized in that it notifies the player.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, and C1 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the input of the second information given to the player is received by the receiving means, and the third information regarding the gaming state after the input is received by the receiving means based on the instruction from the player is output by the output means. To. Then, from the time when the input is received by the receiving means until the output is performed by the output means, when it is detected by the detecting means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, the notification means is notified. .. As a result, the person who has input the second information given to the player can obtain the notification by the notification means by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means, and output the third information regarding the game state from the output means. For example, even if the person leaves the seat, there is an effect that another person can perform a predetermined operation on the operating means so that the result of the notification cannot be grasped.

The acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the display means for the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display execution means for executing a dynamic display is provided, and when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the player is determined. In the game machine that gives the game value of
A storage means that stores information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until at least used for determination by the determination means.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A detection means that detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means that performs notification based on the information stored in the storage means, and
The first reception means that accepts the input of the fourth information from the player,
It is equipped with a second reception means that accepts the input of the fifth information from the player.
The notification means is provided to the operating means by the detecting means from the time when the input of the fourth information is received by the first receiving means to the time when the input of the fifth information is received by the second receiving means. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that it notifies when it is detected that a predetermined operation has been performed.

According to the gaming machine D9, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a predetermined game value. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for the determination by the determination means. That is, if a predetermined start condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on that information is suspended. Here, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the notification means performs notification based on the information stored in the storage means. .. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, it is possible to grasp the information regarding the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification means. Therefore, based on the information on the dynamic display of the identification information that is suspended for execution, which is grasped based on the notification, whether or not the game can be stopped immediately when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the work. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily make a judgment. Further, the input of the fourth information from the player is accepted by the first reception means, and the input of the fifth information from the player is accepted by the second reception means. Then, from the time when the input of the fourth information is received by the first receiving means until the input of the fifth information is received by the second receiving means, a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means by the detecting means. When is detected, notification is performed by the notification means. As a result, if the person who input the fourth information obtains the notification by the notification means by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means and inputs the fifth information, even if the person leaves the seat, another person Has the effect that it is possible to perform a predetermined operation on the operating means so that the result of the notification cannot be grasped. The fourth information and the fifth information may be the same or different.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, and C1 to C8.
The first reception means that accepts the input of the fourth information from the player,
It is equipped with a second reception means that accepts the input of the fifth information from the player.
The notification means is provided to the operating means by the detecting means from the time when the input of the fourth information is received by the first receiving means to the time when the input of the fifth information is received by the second receiving means. The gaming machine D10 is characterized in that it notifies when it is detected that a predetermined operation has been performed.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, and C1 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the input of the fourth information from the player is accepted by the first reception means, and the input of the fifth information from the player is accepted by the second reception means. Then, from the time when the input of the fourth information is received by the first receiving means until the input of the fifth information is received by the second receiving means, a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means by the detecting means. When is detected, notification is performed by the notification means. As a result, if the person who input the fourth information obtains the notification by the notification means by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means and inputs the fifth information, even if the person leaves the seat, another person Has the effect that it is possible to perform a predetermined operation on the operating means so that the result of the notification cannot be grasped. The fourth information and the fifth information may be the same or different.

A gaming machine E1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8, and D1 to D10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine E2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8, and D1 to D10. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8, and D1 to D10, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

It should be noted that the "ball entry" into the "first ball entry port 64" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined starting condition" in the claims, and the "counters C1 to C3" described in the above embodiment. The "value of CS1" corresponds to the "information" acquired by the "acquisition means" in the claims, and the "third symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claims. However, the "variation effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "dynamic display of identification information" described in the claims, and the "big hit symbol" described in the above embodiment is described in the claims. Corresponding to the "predetermined identification information", the "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined gaming value" described in the claims.
(others)
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the start winning opening and a start winning is detected while a variable display (variation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , There is a case where the variable effect related to the starting prize is suspended up to a predetermined number. When the execution of the variation effect being executed is completed, the execution of the variation effect related to the start winning prize detected first among the pending unexecuted variation effects is started (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340046).
In the conventional gaming machine, when the player wants to stop the game and leave the seat, or when he / she wants to complete a message such as a mobile phone call or an e-mail in the middle of the game, the variable staging is suspended. Since there is a possibility that there is a variable effect that is a hit in the pending variable effect, it is difficult for the player to immediately stop the game and leave the seat, or to start a business in the middle of the game. There is a problem.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of making a player easily determine whether or not the gaming may be stopped immediately. The purpose is.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
23 Notification button (operation means)
64 Acting port (1st ball entry port)
81 Third symbol display device (display means, part of notification means)
114 Display control device (dynamic display execution means, part of notification means)
223b Look-ahead information storage area (storage means)
223h Notification button invalid flag (non-execution means)
S204 (acquisition means)
S307 Fluctuation start processing (determination means)
S1311 (detection means)
S1321 (Stop state determination means)
S1334 (Judgment means)
S1335, S1336, S1337, S1340 (part of the notification means)
S1338, S1339 (calculation means)
S1364 (Memory judgment means)
S1365 (Release means)

Claims (1)

The acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the display means for the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. A dynamic display execution means for executing a dynamic display is provided, and when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the player is determined. In the game machine that gives the game value of
A storage means that stores information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until at least used for determination by the determination means.
Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Judgment means to judge,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A detection means that detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and
When it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means capable of notifying based on the judgment result by the determination means while the operation is being performed, and the notification means.
A gaming machine comprising: means for causing the display means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information to perform notification by the notification means while the operation is being performed.

Images